diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'obsolete/biblio/bibtex')
36 files changed, 42005 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/acm.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/acm.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1750daa7a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/acm.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1134 @@ +% ACM Transactions bibliography style (24-Jan-88 version) +% A lot like abbrv.bst, but names come out "Last, initials", and in \sc. +% Some dates are parenthesized. +% +% History +% 2/ 6/86 (HWT) Original version, by Howard Trickey. +% 3/ 5/86 (HWT) Put in pp. everywhere but articles, as per ACM style. +% 1/24/88 (OP&HWT) Updated for BibTeX version 0.99a, Oren Patashnik; +% corrected the abbreviations to "Mar." and "Sept."; +% THIS `acm' VERSION DOES NOT WORK WITH BIBTEX 0.98i. + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + {} + { label } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t } + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasizeic} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "\/}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {scapify} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { t "others" = + { ", et~al." * } + { ", and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +% For names inside entries (e.g., editors of an "In ..."); +% this is exactly ABBRV.BST's `format.names' function. +FUNCTION {format.innames} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names scapify } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names scapify + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", Eds." * } + { ", Ed." * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.ineditors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.innames + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", Eds." * } + { ", Ed." * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { month empty$ + { "" } + { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ + month + } + if$ + } + { month empty$ + 'year + { month " " * year * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "vol.~" volume * + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "no.~" } + { "No.~" } + if$ + number * + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ "~ed." * } + { edition "t" change.case$ "~ed." * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages n.dashify } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pp.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp.~" pages n.dashify * } + { "p.~" pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.journal.vol.num.date} +{ journal empty$ + { "empty journal in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { journal + volume empty$ + 'skip$ + { " " * volume * } + if$ + number empty$ + 'emphasizeic + { emphasize ", " * number * } + if$ + year empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " (" * format.date * ")" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pp.pages + { type empty$ + { "ch.~" chapter * } + { type "l" change.case$ chapter tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pp.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { "In " booktitle emphasize * + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.ineditors * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +% The proceedings title (it's on the stack) gets an (address, date) appended +FUNCTION {format.proc.date} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { year empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ + address empty$ + 'emphasize + { emphasizeic + " (" * address * ")" * + } + if$ + } + { emphasizeic + " (" * + address empty$ + 'skip$ + { address * ", " * } + if$ + format.date * + ")" * + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.proc.date} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { "In " booktitle format.proc.date * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + key empty$ not and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Tech. Rep." } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " journal * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Vol.~" volume * + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.journal.vol.num.date output + format.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pp.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.edition output + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.edition output + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.date "year" output.check + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.edition output + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull } + if$ + format.chapter.pages output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.proc.date "booktitle" output.check + format.ineditors output + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + organization output + publisher output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull } + if$ + format.pp.pages output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization scapify output } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.edition output + author empty$ + { address new.block.checka } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization scapify output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + title format.proc.date "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} + +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} + +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} + +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} + +MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} + +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} + +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} + +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} + +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} + +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Program. Lang. Syst."} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} + +READ + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} +{ author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {presort} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.organization.sort + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.organization.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { longest.label } + +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } + +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} + +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} + +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/cea.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/cea.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af72438f51 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/cea.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1124 @@ +%% Save file as: CEA.BST Source: FILESERV@SHSU.BITNET
+% Name: cea.bst
+% Description: BibTeX style for Computers and Electronics in Agriculture
+% Keywords: BibTeX, bibliography style
+% Author: James Darrell McCauley <jdm5548@diamond.tamu.edu>
+% Latest Version: Version 0.1 <13 Mar 1992>
+% Archives: niord.shsu.edu or FILESERV@SHSU.BITNET
+% Note: This is a hack of apalike.bst and not official by Elsevier Sci Pub
+% (See CHANGE LOG below)
+% See also: cea.sty
+%
+% CHANGE LOG
+% Date Ver Changes
+% <13 Mar 1992> 0.9 Modified from apalike.bst <jdm5548@diamond.tamu.edu>
+% BibTeX `apalike' bibliography style (24-Jan-88 version)
+%
+% BibTeX `cea' bibliography style <13 Mar 1992>
+% Adapted from the `apalike' bibliography style (24-Jan-88 version)
+% Adapted from the `alpha' style, version 0.99a; for BibTeX version 0.99a.
+% Copyright (C) 1988, all rights reserved.
+% Copying of this file is allowed, provided that if you make any changes at all
+% you name it something other than `apalike.bst'.
+% This restriction helps ensure that all copies are identical.
+% Differences between this style and `alpha' are generally heralded by a `%'.
+% The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for alpha.bst.
+%
+% This style should be used with the `cea' LaTeX style (cea.sty).
+% \cite's come out like "(Jones, 1986)" in the text but there are no labels
+% in the bibliography, and something like "1986" comes out immediately
+% after the author. Author (and editor) names appear as last name, comma,
+% initials. A `year' field is required for every entry, and so is either
+% an author (or in some cases, an editor) field or a key field.
+%
+% Editorial note:
+% Many journals, such as Computers and Electronics in Agriculture,
+% require a style like `apalike', but I strongly, strongly, strongly
+% recommend that you not use it if you have a choice---use something
+% like `plain' instead. Mary-Claire van Leunen (A Handbook for
+% Scholars, Knopf, 1979) argues convincingly that a style like `plain'
+% encourages better writing than one like `apalike'. Furthermore the
+% strongest arguments for using an author-date style like
+% `apalike'---that it's "the most practical" (The Chicago Manual of
+% Style, University of Chicago Press, thirteenth edition, 1982, pages
+% 400--401)---fall flat on their face with the new computer-typesetting
+% technology. For instance page 401 anachronistically states "The chief
+% disadvantage of [a style like `plain'] is that additions or deletions
+% cannot be made after the manuscript is typed without changing numbers
+% in both text references and list." LaTeX sidesteps the disadvantage.
+%
+
+ENTRY
+ { address
+ author
+ booktitle
+ chapter
+ edition
+ editor
+ howpublished
+ institution
+ journal
+ key
+% month not used in apalike
+ note
+ number
+ organization
+ pages
+ publisher
+ school
+ series
+ title
+ type
+ volume
+ year
+ }
+ {}
+ { label extra.label sort.label }
+
+INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block }
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{ #0 'before.all :=
+ #1 'mid.sentence :=
+ #2 'after.sentence :=
+ #3 'after.block :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t }
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{ 's :=
+ output.state mid.sentence =
+ { ", " * write$ }
+ { output.state after.block =
+ { add.period$ write$
+ newline$
+ "\newblock " write$
+ }
+ { output.state before.all =
+ 'write$
+ { add.period$ " " * write$ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ mid.sentence 'output.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+ s
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ 'output.nonnull
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ 't :=
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ 'output.nonnull
+ if$
+}
+
+% apalike needs this function because
+% the year has special punctuation;
+% apalike ignores the month
+FUNCTION {output.year.check}
+{ year empty$
+ { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ }
+ { write$
+ " " year * extra.label * "" *
+ mid.sentence 'output.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{ newline$
+ "\bibitem[" write$
+ label write$
+ "]{" write$
+ cite$ write$
+ "}" write$
+ newline$
+ ""
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{ add.period$
+ write$
+ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpub.note}
+{ add.period$
+ write$
+ " (unpubl.)"
+ write$
+ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+ 'skip$
+ { after.block 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block =
+ 'skip$
+ { output.state before.all =
+ 'skip$
+ { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{ 'skip$
+ { pop$ #0 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{ { pop$ #1 }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+ swap$ empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ 'new.block
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ { "{\rm " swap$ * "}" * } % changed from \em to \rm
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first
+ nameptr #1 >
+ { namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ { numnames #2 >
+ { "," * }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ { " et~al." * }
+ { " and " * t * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author empty$
+ { "" }
+ { author format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key} % this function is just for apalike
+{ empty$
+ { key field.or.null }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor empty$
+ { "" }
+ { editor format.names
+ editor num.names$ #1 >
+ { " (Editors)" * }
+ { " (Editor)" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title empty$
+ { "" }
+ { title "t" change.case$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+ { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+ { "--" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+ { "-" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{ title emphasize
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+ { "~" }
+ { " " }
+ if$
+ swap$ * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume empty$
+ { "" }
+ { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect
+ series empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { " of " * series emphasize * }
+ if$
+ "volume and number" number either.or.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+ { number empty$
+ { series field.or.null }
+ { output.state mid.sentence =
+ { "number" }
+ { "Number" }
+ if$
+ number tie.or.space.connect
+ series empty$
+ { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ }
+ { " in " * series * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition empty$
+ { "" }
+ { output.state mid.sentence =
+ { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * }
+ { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+ #0 'multiresult :=
+ { multiresult not
+ t empty$ not
+ and
+ }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "-" =
+ swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+ swap$ "+" =
+ or or
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages empty$
+ { "" }
+ { pages multi.page.check
+ { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect }
+ { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages}
+{ volume field.or.null
+ number empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "(" number * ")" * *
+ volume empty$
+ { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ pages empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ format.pages }
+ { ":" * pages n.dashify * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+ 'format.pages
+ { type empty$
+ { "chapter" }
+ { type "l" change.case$ }
+ if$
+ chapter tie.or.space.connect
+ pages empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ", " * format.pages * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{ booktitle empty$
+ { "" }
+ { editor empty$
+ { "In: " booktitle emphasize * }
+ { "In: " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { pop$
+ type "t" change.case$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ type empty$
+ { "Technical Report" }
+ 'type
+ if$
+ number empty$
+ { "t" change.case$ }
+ { number tie.or.space.connect }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{ "In:" % this is for apalike
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume empty$
+ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+ "In: "
+ }
+ { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect
+ " of " *
+ }
+ if$
+ "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * % this is for apalike
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{ "In:" % this is for apalike
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.title "title" output.check
+ new.block
+ crossref missing$
+ { journal emphasize "journal" output.check
+ format.vol.num.pages output
+ }
+ { format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ { format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }
+ { format.authors output.nonnull
+ crossref missing$
+ { "author and editor" editor either.or.check }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ output.year.check % special for apalike
+ new.block
+ format.btitle "title" output.check
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.bvolume output
+ new.block
+ format.number.series output
+ new.sentence
+ publisher "publisher" output.check
+ address output
+ }
+ { new.block
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ }
+ if$
+ format.edition output
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.title "title" output.check
+ new.block
+ howpublished output
+ address output
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ { format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }
+ { format.authors output.nonnull
+ crossref missing$
+ { "author and editor" editor either.or.check }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ output.year.check % special for apalike
+ new.block
+ format.btitle "title" output.check
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.bvolume output
+ format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
+ new.block
+ format.number.series output
+ new.sentence
+ publisher "publisher" output.check
+ address output
+ }
+ { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
+ new.block
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ }
+ if$
+ format.edition output
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.title "title" output.check
+ new.block
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.number.series output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ new.sentence
+ publisher "publisher" output.check
+ address output
+ format.edition output
+ }
+ { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.title "title" output.check
+ new.block
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check
+ address output % for apalike
+ new.sentence % there's no year
+ organization output % here so things
+ publisher output % are simpler
+% format.bvolume output
+% format.number.series output
+% format.pages output
+ format.vol.num.pages output
+ }
+ { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.btitle "title" output.check
+ organization address new.block.checkb
+ organization output
+ address output
+ format.edition output
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.title "title" output.check
+ new.block
+ "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull
+ school "school" output.check
+ address output
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.title output
+ new.block
+ howpublished output
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.btitle "title" output.check
+ new.block
+ "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull
+ school "school" output.check
+ address output
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.editors output
+ editor format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.btitle "title" output.check
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.number.series output
+ address output % for apalike
+ new.sentence % we always output
+ organization output % a nonempty organization
+ publisher output % here
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.title "title" output.check
+ new.block
+ format.tr.number output.nonnull
+ institution "institution" output.check
+ address output
+ new.block
+ note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output % special for
+ output.year.check % apalike
+ new.block
+ format.title "title" output.check
+ new.block
+ note "note" output.check
+ unpub.note
+% fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"January"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"February"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"March"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"April"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"June"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"July"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"August"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"September"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"October"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"November"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"December"}
+
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"}
+
+READ
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+ "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+ 'len :=
+ s #1 len substring$ =
+ { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+ 's
+ if$
+}
+
+% There are three apalike cases: one person (Jones),
+% two (Jones and de~Bruijn), and more (Jones et~al.).
+% This function is much like format.crossref.editors.
+%
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+ s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+ s num.names$ duplicate$
+ #2 >
+ { pop$ " et~al." * }
+ { #2 <
+ 'skip$
+ { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+ { " et~al." * }
+ { " and " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key % apalike uses the whole key
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key % apalike uses the whole key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key % apalike uses the whole key, no organization
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.key.label
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.key.label % apalike ignores organization
+ 'author.key.label % for labeling and sorting
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ ", " % these three lines are
+ * % for apalike, which
+ year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ % uses all four digits
+ *
+ 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { nameptr #1 >
+ { " " * }
+ 'skip$
+ if$ % apalike uses initials
+ s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := % <= here
+ nameptr numnames = t "others" = and
+ { "et al" * }
+ { t sortify * }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+ "A " #2
+ "An " #3
+ "The " #4 t chop.word
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+ sortify
+ #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+% apalike uses two sorting passes; the first one sets the
+% labels so that the `a's, `b's, etc. can be computed;
+% the second pass puts the references in "correct" order.
+% The presort function is for the first pass. It computes
+% label, sort.label, and title, and then concatenates.
+FUNCTION {presort}
+{ calc.label
+ label sortify
+ " "
+ *
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.sort
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.sort
+ 'author.sort
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$ % for
+ 'sort.label := % apalike
+ sort.label % style
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null
+ sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort}
+
+SORT % by label, sort.label, title---for final label calculation
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra } % apalike labels are only for the text;
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num } % there are none in the bibliography
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} % and hence there is no `longest.label'
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+ "" 'next.extra :=
+ #0 'last.extra.num :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ last.label label =
+ { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+ last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+ }
+ { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+ "" 'extra.label :=
+ label 'last.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+ { "a" 'extra.label := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ label extra.label * 'label :=
+ extra.label 'next.extra :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+% Now that the label is right we sort for real,
+% on sort.label then year then title. This is
+% for the second sorting pass.
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.order}
+{ sort.label
+ " "
+ *
+ year field.or.null sortify
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null
+ sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.order}
+
+SORT % by sort.label, year, title---giving final bibliography order
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{ preamble$ empty$ % no \etalchar in apalike
+ 'skip$
+ { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+ "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ % no labels in apalike
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+ "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic/econometrica-fr.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic/econometrica-fr.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..285107d20b --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic/econometrica-fr.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1241 @@ +%%% Econometrica-fr bibliography style +%%% For use with harvard.sty and LaTeX2e (NFSS) or LaTeX 2.09 +%%% 24-aug-94 +%%% +%%% Based on econometrica.bst, but with modifications by +%%% horny@cournot.u-strasbg.fr +%%% Please report any problems to me. +%%% +%% NOTICE: +%% This file may be used for non-profit purposes. +%% It may not be distributed in exchange for money, +%% other than distribution costs. +%% +%% The author provides it `as is' and does not guarantee it in any way. +%% +%%----------------------------------------------------------- +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%%--------------------------------------------------------------------- + % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is + % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a style option to function properly. + % The appropriate style file is: harvard.sty + % The form of the bibitem entries is + % \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Smith}{1990}{key}... + % There are style changes that may be specified in the text with + % the command \citationstyle. + % \citeasnoun{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990) + % \cite{key} ==>> (Jones et al. 1990) + % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al. 1990, chap. 2) + % On the first citation of any work, the full author list is used. +%%--------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + {} + { label extra.label sort.label } %%%KCB: removed long.label + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +%%%KCB: new output state, no.comma +INTEGERS { no.comma} + +FUNCTION{fr.and}{ %% le "et" entre les deux derniers auteurs +" et " +} + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := + #4 'no.comma := %%%KCB +} + +STRINGS { s t } + + +%%%KCB: revise to use new output state +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state no.comma = %%%KCB: if in this state, write a space + { " " * write$ before.all 'output.state := } %%%KCB + { output.state mid.sentence = %%%KCB: add brace at beginning + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } %%%KCB: matching brace + if$ %%%KCB: test for no.comma state + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\harvarditem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" label * "}{" * write$ %%%KCB: replaced long.label with label + year duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "????" } + 'skip$ + if$ + extra.label * "}{" * write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +%%%KCB: Here is a portable set of routines to check for repeated authors +%%% and replace them with a 3 em dash +%%% According to _Chicago_Manual_of_Style_, a dash is used to +%%% replace an author's name only if the entire list is the same, so: +%%% Compare names. See if prev.name is identical to CurrList. +%%% If not, then just output CurrList. +%%% If so, replace with \BySame +%%% I use a conservative matching scheme, +%%% and check to see if full names are identical, +%%% even though we only use initials. +%%% This may mean that you have to correct your .bib database +%%% to ensure consistency. +%%% +%%% sample usage: +%%% search for {format.author} + +INTEGERS {currNum prevNum} + +STRINGS {PrevList CurrList prev.name PrevTemp CurrTemp} + +%%%KCB: Initialize prev.name ot some nonsense string: + +FUNCTION {init.prev.name} +{ +"My puppy Harley" 'prev.name := +} + +%%%KCB: Must EXECUTE {init.prev.name} after READ + +%%%KCB: <CurrList> compare.names <modified name list> +FUNCTION {compare.names} +{ prev.name 'PrevList := + duplicate$ 'prev.name := % make current list the new previous list + 'CurrList := + PrevList num.names$ 'prevNum := + CurrList num.names$ 'currNum := +% + prevNum currNum = %% If prevNum = currNum + { "" 'PrevTemp := %% Then take this branch + "" 'CurrTemp := + #1 'nameptr := %%% start with first name in each list + { nameptr prevNum > not }%% while nameptr <= prevNum +%% Format both lists the same way. +%% Use full names: bib file might need to be corrected + { + PrevList nameptr "{ff }{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ PrevTemp * 'PrevTemp := + CurrList nameptr "{ff }{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ CurrTemp * 'CurrTemp := + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := } + while$ +%% Now compare : + PrevTemp CurrTemp = %% If PrevTemp = CurrTemp + { "\BySame{}" } + { CurrList } + if$ + } + { CurrList } %% If not prevNum = currNum + if$ %% If prevNum = currNum +} + +%%% +%%% +%%%KCB: End of new routine. + + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := } + if$ + nameptr #1 > + { + namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { + ", " * + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { fr.and * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + + +FUNCTION {format.names.ed} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr + "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" + format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { + namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { + ", " * + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { fr.and * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.key} +{ empty$ + { key field.or.null } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { "\textsc{" author compare.names format.names * "} " * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "\textsc{" editor compare.names format.names * " }" * + editor num.names$ #1 > + { " (eds.)" * } + { " (ed.)" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names.ed + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title + "``" swap$ * ",'' " * + } +no.comma 'output.state := %%%KCB: + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {word.in} +{ "dans " } + +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year duplicate$ empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$ + pop$ "????" } + 'skip$ + if$ + " (" swap$ * extra.label * "):" * %%%KCB: added : + before.all 'output.state := %%%KCB: +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +no.comma 'output.state := %%%KCB: +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "vol." volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "no." } + { "No." } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edn." * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edn." * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ", " * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chap." } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { word.in booktitle emphasize * } + { word.in booktitle emphasize * ", ed. " * %%%KCB: abbrv ed. + format.in.editors * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Document de \uppercase{t}ravail" } %%%KCB: changed default + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ + word.in + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + word.in + } + { "vol." volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ + word.in + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + format.date "year" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + mid.sentence 'output.state := %%%KCB: + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished output + address output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + format.date "year" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address output + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +%%%KCB: special issue of a journal with a special editor + +FUNCTION {issue} +{ output.bibitem + format.editors output + editor format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + organization output + address output + format.edition output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + "Mémoire de DEA" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title output + howpublished output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + "Thèse de \uppercase{d}octorat" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.editors output + editor format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address output + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + note "note" output.check + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"Janvier"} + +MACRO {feb} {"Février"} + +MACRO {mar} {"Mars"} + +MACRO {apr} {"Avril"} + +MACRO {may} {"Mai"} + +MACRO {jun} {"Juin"} + +MACRO {jul} {"Juillet"} + +MACRO {aug} {"Août"} + +MACRO {sep} {"Septembre"} + +MACRO {oct} {"Octobre"} + +MACRO {nov} {"Novembre"} + +MACRO {dec} {"Decembre"} + +%%%KCB: removed computer science journal macros +%%%KCB: added following macros for editions +MACRO {first} {"1er "} +MACRO {second} {"2d "} +MACRO {third} {"3ème "} +MACRO {fourth} {"4ème "} +MACRO {fifth} {"5ème "} +MACRO {sixth} {"6ème "} +MACRO {seventh} {"7ème "} +MACRO {eighth} {"8ème "} +MACRO {ninth} {"9ème "} +MACRO {tenth} {"10ème "} + +READ + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + + +%%%KCB: Change format of labels: +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { fr.and * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +%%%KCB: removed FUNCTION {format.long.lab.names} + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +%%%KCB: use entire year field as label + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + type$ "issue" = %%%KCB: need for new entry type + or %%%KCB + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + ", " + * + year field.or.null + * + 'label := +} + +FUNCTION {calc.short.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + 'label := +} + +%%%KCB: removed FUNCTION {calc.long.label} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + s nameptr + "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" + format.name$ 't := + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + label sortify + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + type$ "issue" = %%%KCB: need for new entry type + or %%%KCB + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.label := + sort.label + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { last.label next.extra } + +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } + +FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.label label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + label 'last.label := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + extra.label 'next.extra := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} + +EXECUTE {init.prev.name} %%%KCB: needed for replacing repeated authors + +ITERATE {forward.pass} + +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} +{ sort.label + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := + calc.short.label +%%%KCB: removed calc.long.label +} + +ITERATE {bib.sort.order} + +SORT + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ +%%%KCB: add defn of \BySame, can be overridden in document +"\ifx\undefined\BySame" write$ newline$ + "\newcommand{\BySame}{\leavevmode\rule[.5ex]{3em}{.5pt}\ }" + write$ newline$ + "\fi" write$ newline$ +%%% KCB: For those who still cling to LaTeX 2.09 +"\ifx\undefined\textsc" write$ newline$ + "\newcommand{\textsc}[1]{{\sc #1}}" + write$ newline$ + "\newcommand{\emph}[1]{{\em #1\/}}" + write$ newline$ +"\let\tmpsmall\small" write$ newline$ +"\renewcommand{\small}{\tmpsmall\sc}" write$ newline$ + "\fi" write$ newline$ +%%% + "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +"Done." top$ %%%KCB: Signal end for NeXTeX's TexView +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} +%% End of customized bst file diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic/econometrica.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic/econometrica.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1ebf5065be --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic/econometrica.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1292 @@ +%%% Econometrica bibliography style +%%% For use with harvard.sty and LaTeX2e (NFSS) or LaTeX 2.09 +%%% 24-aug-94 +%%% +%%% Based on makebst, but with modifications by +%%% kcb@hss.caltech.edu (KC Border) +%%% Please report any problems to me. +%%% +%%% The main changes from the ouput of makebst are: +%%% 1. Addition of a function to replace repeated authors with a 3 em dash. +%%% (Search for compare.names, this function is portable.) +%%% 2. Modification of output.nonnull to allow commas inside quotation marks +%%% and no comma after year. +%%% 3.Eliminated feature (bug?) of the harvard style of citation. +%%% It creates a short label for subsequent citations. This alleged +%%% feature shortens both Aliprantis, Border, and Luxemburg (1991) and +%%% Aliprantis, Brown, and Burkinshaw (1991) to Aliprantis et~al. (1991). +%%% This creates the need to label these as +%%% Aliprantis, Border, and Luxemburg (1991a) and +%%% Aliprantis, Brown, and Burkinshaw (1991b), despite the fact +%%% that these entries have different authors. I used my own format +%%% for creating the labels, and used the same label for +%%% both the short and long forms. I know that the +%%% _Chicago_Manual_of_Style recommends using Aliprantis et~al, +%% but Econometrica regularly writes out three authors, +%% and it is rare to cite an article with more than four authors in +%%% Econometrica. (I couldn't find an example of even four being cited, +%%% but I didn't spend a lot of time looking.) +%%% 4. Addition of macros to handle editions. (My own idiosycracy.) +%%% 5. A new entry type called issue for special issues of a journal. +%%% (Another idiosyncracy.) +%%% 6. Many details to conform to Econometrica's quirks. +%%% (Search for KCB ) +%%% 7. I wrote this for use with LaTeX2e and the NFSS2. However, I did +%%% add some macros so it will work with LaTeX 2.09. +%%% (Search for \ifx\undefined\emph ) +%%% The remainder of this file was generated by makebst, except for +%%% modifications marked with KCB. +%% +%% This is file `em.bst', generated +%% on <1994/8/17> with the docstrip utility (2.2h). +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% genbst.mbs (with options: `ay,har,nm-rev1,nmft-sc,dt-beg,yr-par,tit-qq,atit-u,thtit-a,volp-com,edby,blk-com,pp,ed,abr,and-com,nfss') +%% ---------------------------------------- +%% *** Econometrica style *** +%% +%% (Here are the specifications of the source file) +%% \def\filename{genbst.mbs} +%% \def\filedate{1994 July 1} +%% \def\fileversion{1.3} +%% For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09 +%%------------------------------------------------------------------- +%% NOTICE: +%% This file may be used for non-profit purposes. +%% It may not be distributed in exchange for money, +%% other than distribution costs. +%% +%% The author provides it `as is' and does not guarantee it in any way. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994 Patrick W. Daly +%% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie +%% Postfach 20 +%% D-37189 Katlenburg-Lindau +%% Germany +%% +%% E-mail: +%% SPAN-- nsp::linmpi::daly (note nsp also known as ecd1) +%% Internet-- daly@linmpi.dnet.gwdg.de +%%----------------------------------------------------------- +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%%--------------------------------------------------------------------- + % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is + % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a style option to function properly. + % The appropriate style file is: harvard.sty + % The form of the bibitem entries is + % \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Smith}{1990}{key}... + % There are style changes that may be specified in the text with + % the command \citationstyle. + % \citeasnoun{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990) + % \cite{key} ==>> (Jones et al. 1990) + % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al. 1990, chap. 2) + % On the first citation of any work, the full author list is used. +%%--------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + {} + { label extra.label sort.label } %%%KCB: removed long.label + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +%%%KCB: new output state, no.comma +INTEGERS { no.comma} + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := + #4 'no.comma := %%%KCB +} + +STRINGS { s t } + + +%%%KCB: revise to use new output state +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state no.comma = %%%KCB: if in this state, write a space + { " " * write$ before.all 'output.state := } %%%KCB + { output.state mid.sentence = %%%KCB: add brace at beginning + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } %%%KCB: matching brace + if$ %%%KCB: test for no.comma state + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\harvarditem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" label * "}{" * write$ %%%KCB: replaced long.label with label + year duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "????" } + 'skip$ + if$ + extra.label * "}{" * write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +%%%KCB: Here is a portable set of routines to check for repeated authors +%%% and replace them with a 3 em dash +%%% According to _Chicago_Manual_of_Style_, a dash is used to +%%% replace an author's name only if the entire list is the same, so: +%%% Compare names. See if prev.name is identical to CurrList. +%%% If not, then just output CurrList. +%%% If so, replace with \BySame +%%% I use a conservative matching scheme, +%%% and check to see if full names are identical, +%%% even though we only use initials. +%%% This may mean that you have to correct your .bib database +%%% to ensure consistency. +%%% +%%% sample usage: +%%% search for {format.author} + +INTEGERS {currNum prevNum} + +STRINGS {PrevList CurrList prev.name PrevTemp CurrTemp} + +%%%KCB: Initialize prev.name ot some nonsense string: + +FUNCTION {init.prev.name} +{ +"My puppy Harley" 'prev.name := +} + +%%%KCB: Must EXECUTE {init.prev.name} after READ + +%%%KCB: <CurrList> compare.names <modified name list> +FUNCTION {compare.names} +{ prev.name 'PrevList := + duplicate$ 'prev.name := % make current list the new previous list + 'CurrList := + PrevList num.names$ 'prevNum := + CurrList num.names$ 'currNum := +% + prevNum currNum = %% If prevNum = currNum + { "" 'PrevTemp := %% Then take this branch + "" 'CurrTemp := + #1 'nameptr := %%% start with first name in each list + { nameptr prevNum > not }%% while nameptr <= prevNum +%% Format both lists the same way. +%% Use full names: bib file might need to be corrected + { + PrevList nameptr "{ff }{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ PrevTemp * 'PrevTemp := + CurrList nameptr "{ff }{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ CurrTemp * 'CurrTemp := + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := } + while$ +%% Now compare : + PrevTemp CurrTemp = %% If PrevTemp = CurrTemp + { "\BySame{}" } + { CurrList } + if$ + } + { CurrList } %% If not prevNum = currNum + if$ %% If prevNum = currNum +} + +%%% +%%% +%%%KCB: End of new routine. + + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := } + if$ + nameptr #1 > + { + namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { + ", " * + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " {\small and} " * t * } %%%KCB: added \small + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + + +FUNCTION {format.names.ed} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr + "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" + format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { + namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { + ", " * + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " {\small and} " * t * } %%%KCB: added \small + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.key} +{ empty$ + { key field.or.null } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { "\textsc{" author compare.names format.names * "} " * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "\textsc{" editor compare.names format.names * " }" * + editor num.names$ #1 > + { " (eds.)" * } + { " (ed.)" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names.ed + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title + "``" swap$ * ",'' " * + } +no.comma 'output.state := %%%KCB: + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {word.in} +{ "in " } + +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year duplicate$ empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$ + pop$ "????" } + 'skip$ + if$ + " (" swap$ * extra.label * "):" * %%%KCB: added : + before.all 'output.state := %%%KCB: +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +no.comma 'output.state := %%%KCB: +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "vol." volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "no." } + { "No." } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edn." * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edn." * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ", " * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chap." } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { word.in booktitle emphasize * } + { word.in booktitle emphasize * ", ed. by " * %%%KCB: abbrv ed. + format.in.editors * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Discussion Paper" } %%%KCB: changed default + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ + word.in + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + word.in + } + { "vol." volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ + word.in + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + format.date "year" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + mid.sentence 'output.state := %%%KCB: + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished output + address output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + format.date "year" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address output + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +%%%KCB: special issue of a journal with a special editor + +FUNCTION {issue} +{ output.bibitem + format.editors output + editor format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + organization output + address output + format.edition output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title output + howpublished output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + "Ph.D. thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.editors output + editor format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address output + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output + format.date "year" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + note "note" output.check + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"January"} + +MACRO {feb} {"February"} + +MACRO {mar} {"March"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"October"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"December"} + +%%%KCB: removed computer science journal macros +%%%KCB: added following macros for editions +MACRO {first} {"1st "} +MACRO {second} {"2d "} +MACRO {third} {"3d "} +MACRO {fourth} {"4th "} +MACRO {fifth} {"5th "} +MACRO {sixth} {"6th"} +MACRO {seventh} {"7th "} +MACRO {eighth} {"8th "} +MACRO {ninth} {"9th "} +MACRO {tenth} {"10th "} + +READ + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + + +%%%KCB: Change format of labels: +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +%%%KCB: removed FUNCTION {format.long.lab.names} + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +%%%KCB: use entire year field as label + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + type$ "issue" = %%%KCB: need for new entry type + or %%%KCB + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + ", " + * + year field.or.null + * + 'label := +} + +FUNCTION {calc.short.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + 'label := +} + +%%%KCB: removed FUNCTION {calc.long.label} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + s nameptr + "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" + format.name$ 't := + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + label sortify + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + type$ "issue" = %%%KCB: need for new entry type + or %%%KCB + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.label := + sort.label + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { last.label next.extra } + +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } + +FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.label label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + label 'last.label := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + extra.label 'next.extra := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} + +EXECUTE {init.prev.name} %%%KCB: needed for replacing repeated authors + +ITERATE {forward.pass} + +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} +{ sort.label + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := + calc.short.label +%%%KCB: removed calc.long.label +} + +ITERATE {bib.sort.order} + +SORT + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ +%%%KCB: add defn of \BySame, can be overridden in document +"\ifx\undefined\BySame" write$ newline$ + "\newcommand{\BySame}{\leavevmode\rule[.5ex]{3em}{.5pt}\ }" + write$ newline$ + "\fi" write$ newline$ +%%% KCB: For those who still cling to LaTeX 2.09 +"\ifx\undefined\textsc" write$ newline$ + "\newcommand{\textsc}[1]{{\sc #1}}" + write$ newline$ + "\newcommand{\emph}[1]{{\em #1\/}}" + write$ newline$ +"\let\tmpsmall\small" write$ newline$ +"\renewcommand{\small}{\tmpsmall\sc}" write$ newline$ + "\fi" write$ newline$ +%%% + "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +"Done." top$ %%%KCB: Signal end for NeXTeX's TexView +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} +%% End of customized bst file diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/geralpha/galphac.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/geralpha/galphac.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..18d9d88a5b --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/geralpha/galphac.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1340 @@ +% Adapted bibliography style `galphac' that changes several english-language +% ``constants'' in the style. +% +%% Umlaut-Problem geloest (M\"arz) 7.2.1992 +%% Andreas Schilling, WSI/GRIS, 7400 T\"ubingen +%% andreas@gris.informatik.uni-tuebingen.de +% +% titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) not converted to lower-case +% (they appear as in the database) +% +% Copyright of the changes (C) 1990 by +% Robert Tolksdorf +% K\"ortestr. 30 +% D-1000 Berlin 61 +% West Germany +% +% NO WARRANTY! +% +% Version 0 as of 28.05.90 +% 0.1 31.07.90 +% 1.0 21.09.90 +% HOW TO FIND THE CHANGES: +% Since there were no comments in my original ``alpha''-style all comment- +% lines denote my changes. +% PROBLEMS: +% I had problems to change the month-name ``March'' into ``M\"arz''. Somehow +% the umlaut is not accepted. Experimenting with "a from the +% ``german''-option did not work as well. If you have a hint how to include +% umlauts in a bst, please report. +% OUTLOOK: +% This file could be used as a guide to change the other +% standard-styles. Since I am using only ``alpha'' as I prefer to have +% those impressing looking abbreviations in my bibliographies, I am too +% lazy to publish a complete set of bibliography-styles. If you adapt +% another style, please send a copy (5 1/4" or 3 1/2", 360 KB or 720 KB, +% no HD-disks!). +% BUGS: +% There may still be some entries or fields that are not adapted. I am +% developping this style for about one year, but surely do not have used +% all entry-types or entry-field-combinations. Please report any +% anormalities! +% + +% BibTeX standard bibliography style `alpha' + % version 0.99a for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + {} + { label extra.label sort.label } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t } + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } +% +% Now here we have discovered a bug. The bibliography of the LaTeX-book shows +% the fault: If there are three or more authors, then the final ``and'' before +% the last author's name is preceeded by a comma. This looks ugly and is +% wrong. +% The original and faulty line in format.names reads +% { numnames #2 > +% Actually the generation of the comma is dependent on the number of names +% left. Therefore: +% + { namesleft #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } +% ``and'' is ``und'' in German + { " und " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > +% Let's call them ``Herausgeber'' +% { ", editors" * } +% { ", editor" * } + { ", Hrsg." * } + { ", Hrsg." * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } +% I want the title as typed in the database here RT +% { title "t" change.case$ } + 'title + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { month empty$ + { "" } + { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ + month + } + if$ + } + { month empty$ + 'year + { month " " * year * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } +% ``volume'' is ``Jahrgang'' in German. The abbrv. is ``Jgg.'' (DUDEN) +% { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + { "Jgg." volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = +% `edition' is `Auflage' in german +% { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } +% { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "l" change.case$ ".~Auflage" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ ".~Auflage" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check +% Let's call ``page'' ``Seite'' +% { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } +% { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + { "Seiten" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "Seite" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ":" * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ +% ``chapter'' is ``Kapitel'' in German +% { "chapter" } + { "Kapitel" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "In " booktitle emphasize * } + { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + key empty$ not and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " journal * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } +% ``and'' is ``und'' in German + { " und " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } +% ``volume'' is ``Jahrgang'' in German. See above +% { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + { "Jgg." volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block +% A Master's thesis thesis is called ``Diplomarbeit'' in German +% "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + "Diplomarbeit" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block +% A PhD thesis is called ``Dissertation'' in German +% "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + "Dissertation" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +% Changed the names of the months + +MACRO {jan} {"Januar"} + +MACRO {feb} {"Februar"} + +% problems with the umlaut ! Geloest 7.2.92 A.Schilling +MACRO {mar} {"\Marz"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"Mai"} + +MACRO {jun} {"Juni"} + +MACRO {jul} {"Juli"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"Oktober"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"Dezember"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { et.al.char.used } + +FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used} +{ #0 'et.al.char.used := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used} + +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #1 > + { numnames #4 > + { #3 'namesleft := } + { numnames 'namesleft := } + if$ + #1 'nameptr := + "" + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr numnames = + { s nameptr "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { "{\etalchar{+}}" * + #1 'et.al.char.used := + } + { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ + numnames #4 > + { "{\etalchar{+}}" * + #1 'et.al.char.used := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ + duplicate$ text.length$ #2 < + { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.organization.label + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.key.organization.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + duplicate$ + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #2 substring$ + * + 'label := + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ + * + sortify 'sort.label := +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} +{ author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + sort.label + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.organization.sort + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.organization.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + * + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra } + +INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num } + +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'longest.label.width := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.sort.label sort.label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + sort.label 'last.sort.label := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + label extra.label * 'label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + extra.label 'next.extra := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} + +ITERATE {forward.pass} + +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ "\newcommand{\Marz}{M\" #34 int.to.chr$ * "arz }" * write$ newline$ +%Andreas Schilling 7.2.92 + et.al.char.used + { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} + + diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/geralpha/geralpha.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/geralpha/geralpha.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..79aca9e5f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/geralpha/geralpha.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1340 @@ +Received: From DHDURZ1(MAILER) by DS0RUS54 with Jnet id 2694 + for ZRFN0370@DS0RUS54; Mon, 15 Oct 90 14:27 A +Received: from DHDURZ1 (DANTE) by DHDURZ1 (Mailer R2.03B) with BSMTP id 2687; + Mon, 15 Oct 90 14:25:48 CET +Date: Mon, 15 Oct 90 14:24:52 CET +From: "DANTE e.V." <DANTE@DHDURZ1> +Subject: geralpha.bst +To: Barbara Burr <ZRFN0370@DS0RUS54> + + +% +% Adapted bibliography style `geralpha' that changes several english-language +% ``constants'' in the style. +% +% Copyright of the changes (C) 1990 by +% Robert Tolksdorf +% K\"ortestr. 30 +% D-1000 Berlin 61 +% West Germany +% +% NO WARRANTY! +% +% Version 0 as of 28.05.90 +% 0.1 31.07.90 +% 1.0 21.09.90 +% HOW TO FIND THE CHANGES: +% Since there were no comments in my original ``alpha''-style all comment- +% lines denote my changes. +% PROBLEMS: +% I had problems to change the month-name ``March'' into ``M\"arz''. Somehow +% the umlaut is not accepted. Experimenting with "a from the +% ``german''-option did not work as well. If you have a hint how to include +% umlauts in a bst, please report. +% OUTLOOK: +% This file could be used as a guide to change the other +% standard-styles. Since I am using only ``alpha'' as I prefer to have +% those impressing looking abbreviations in my bibliographies, I am too +% lazy to publish a complete set of bibliography-styles. If you adapt +% another style, please send a copy (5 1/4" or 3 1/2", 360 KB or 720 KB, +% no HD-disks!). +% BUGS: +% There may still be some entries or fields that are not adapted. I am +% developping this style for about one year, but surely do not have used +% all entry-types or entry-field-combinations. Please report any +% anormalities! +% + +% BibTeX standard bibliography style `alpha' + % version 0.99a for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + {} + { label extra.label sort.label } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t } + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } +% +% Now here we have discovered a bug. The bibliography of the LaTeX-book shows +% the fault: If there are three or more authors, then the final ``and'' before +% the last author's name is preceeded by a comma. This looks ugly and is +% wrong. +% The original and faulty line in format.names reads +% { numnames #2 > +% Actually the generation of the comma is dependent on the number of names +% left. Therefore: +% + { namesleft #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } +% ``and'' is ``und'' in German + { " und " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > +% Let's call them ``Herausgeber'' +% { ", editors" * } +% { ", editor" * } + { ", Hrsg." * } + { ", Hrsg." * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } +% I want the title as typed in the database here RT +% { title "t" change.case$ } + 'title + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { month empty$ + { "" } + { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ + month + } + if$ + } + { month empty$ + 'year + { month " " * year * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } +% ``volume'' is ``Jahrgang'' in German. The abbrv. is ``Jgg.'' (DUDEN) +% { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + { "Jgg." volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = +% `edition' is `Auflage' in german +% { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } +% { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "l" change.case$ ".~Auflage" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ ".~Auflage" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check +% Let's call ``page'' ``Seite'' +% { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } +% { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + { "Seiten" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "Seite" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ":" * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ +% ``chapter'' is ``Kapitel'' in German +% { "chapter" } + { "Kapitel" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "In " booktitle emphasize * } + { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + key empty$ not and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " journal * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } +% ``and'' is ``und'' in German + { " und " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } +% ``volume'' is ``Jahrgang'' in German. See above +% { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + { "Jgg." volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block +% A Master's thesis thesis is called ``Diplomarbeit'' in German +% "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + "Diplomarbeit" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block +% A PhD thesis is called ``Dissertation'' in German +% "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + "Dissertation" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +% Changed the names of the months + +MACRO {jan} {"Januar"} + +MACRO {feb} {"Februar"} + +% problems with the umlaut ! +MACRO {mar} {"Marz"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"Mai"} + +MACRO {jun} {"Juni"} + +MACRO {jul} {"Juli"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"Oktober"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"Dezember"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { et.al.char.used } + +FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used} +{ #0 'et.al.char.used := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used} + +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #1 > + { numnames #4 > + { #3 'namesleft := } + { numnames 'namesleft := } + if$ + #1 'nameptr := + "" + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr numnames = + { s nameptr "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { "{\etalchar{+}}" * + #1 'et.al.char.used := + } + { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ + numnames #4 > + { "{\etalchar{+}}" * + #1 'et.al.char.used := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ + duplicate$ text.length$ #2 < + { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.organization.label + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.key.organization.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + duplicate$ + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #2 substring$ + * + 'label := + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ + * + sortify 'sort.label := +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} +{ author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + sort.label + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.organization.sort + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.organization.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + * + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra } + +INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num } + +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'longest.label.width := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.sort.label sort.label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + sort.label 'last.sort.label := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + label extra.label * 'label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + extra.label 'next.extra := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} + +ITERATE {forward.pass} + +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ et.al.char.used + { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/geralpha/geralpha.tex b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/geralpha/geralpha.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..aa7b9634bc --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/geralpha/geralpha.tex @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +%\documentstyle[german,dina4]{article} +%\catcode`\@=11 +% from Frank Mittelbach's doc-option: +%\@ifundefined{BibTeX} +% {\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em% +% T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}}{} +%\catcode`\@=8 + +\author{Robert Tolksdorf} +%\\K"ortestr.~30\\D-1000 Berlin 61} +\title{Deutschsprachige Version des \BibTeX-{\tt alpha}-Stils} +\titlemark{Deutschsprachige Version des \BibTeX-{\tt alpha}-Stils} +\author{Robert Tolksdorf} +\maketitle + + +Die anglophil zentrierte \TeX-Welt l"a"st uns deutschsprachige Anwender +immer wieder neue Aufgaben finden. F"ur meine Papiere an der +Universit"at hat sich mit der Verf"ugbarkeit eines \BibTeX's der Umfang +meiner Literaturlisten erheblich vergr"o"sert. Allerdings haben alle +vordefinierten {\it bibliography-styles\/} den Nachteil, da"s sie auf +englischsprachige Verh"altnisse hin geschrieben wurden. Und in einem +deutschsprachigen Dokument sollte der "`Editor"' eben "`Herausgeber"' +hei"sen. + +Ansatzpunkt f"ur eine Anpassung sind die {\tt .BST}-Dateien, in denen +der Stil in der schlecht lesbaren \BibTeX-Sprache definiert wird. Da +ich {\tt alpha} bevorzuge, liegt nun ein {\tt geralpha.bst} vor. Er +enth"alt "Anderungen an den verschiedensten englischsprachigen +Konstanten, so wird ein "`and"' zu "`und"' und nat"urlich auch die +"`edition"' zur "`Auflage"'. Die Anpassung entspricht allerdings nicht +den strengen Regeln f"ur Literaturverweise, wie sie beispielsweise in +\cite{duden:satz}\ festgelegt sind. + +Ein Problem dabei ist die Aufnahme von Umlauten, was bei der +Umdefinition des Monatsnamen "`march"' in "`M"arz"' n"otig ist. +Versuche mit \verb!\"a! und -- in Verbindung mit {\tt german.sty} -- +\verb!"a! scheiterten. + +Die Anpassung von {\tt alpha} an deutschsprachige Verh"altnisse +entspringt meinem pers"onlichen Be"-d"urfnis. Eine Anpassung der +anderen Stile sollte einfach sein -- ich w"urde mich "uber eine +gemeinsam erstellte, komplette deutschsprachige \BibTeX-Anpassung +freuen. + +Im Rahmen der Anpassung wurde zugleich ein Bug entdeckt, der sich schon +in \cite{lamp:latex}\ in der Literaturliste zeigt. Bei mehreren Autoren +sollten die letzten beiden durch "`and"' bzw.\ "`und"' getrennt sein. +{\tt alpha} f"ugt in der Version 0.99a nach dem vorletzten Namen aber +zus"atzlich ein "uberfl"ussiges Komma ein. {\tt geralpha} behebt diesen +Fehler durch eine Modifikation in der Funktion {\tt format.name}. + +\begin{thebibliography}{Lam86} +\bibitem[DD80]{duden:satz} +Dudenredaktion und Dudensetzerei, Hrsg. +\newblock {\em Satz- und Korrekturanweisungen -- Richtlinien f"ur die + Texterfassung}. +\newblock Duden Taschenb"ucher 5. Bibliographisches Institut, 4.~Auflage, 1980. + +\bibitem[Lam86]{lamp:latex} +Leslie Lamport. +\newblock {\em \LaTeX -- A Document Preparation System}. +\newblock Addison Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986. + +\end{thebibliography} + + diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/agsm.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/agsm.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8ec0494c7c --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/agsm.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1226 @@ +% BibTeX standard bibliography style `agsm' (one of the harvard family) + % version 0.99a for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1991, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, abbrv.bst, agsm.bst, + % dcu.bst or kluwer.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file harvard.tex has the documentation for this style. + +% ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: +% This document is a modified version of alpha.bst to which it owes much of +% its functionality. + +% AUTHOR +% Peter Williams, Key Centre for Design Quality, Sydney University +% e-mail: peterw@archsci.arch.su.oz.au + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + { field.used } + { extra.label sort.label list.year } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t f } + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {item.check} +{ 't := + empty$ + { "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + { skip$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {quote} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "`" swap$ * "'" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + 'f := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr f format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " \& " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" author format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", eds" * } + { ", ed." * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors.reverse} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", eds" * } + { ", ed." * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "Vol." volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " {\em in} " * series quote * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edn" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edn" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp.~" pages n.dashify * } + { "p.~" pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume embolden field.or.null + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ",~" * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "{\em in} " booktitle quote * } + { "{\em in} " format.editors.reverse * ", " * booktitle quote * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + key empty$ not and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "in {\em " journal * "\/} \cite{" * crossref * "}" *} + if$ + } + { "{\em in} \citeasnoun{" crossref * "}" * } + if$ + +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "in " + } + { "Vol." volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/} \cite{" * crossref * "}" *} + if$ + } + { " \citeasnoun{" * crossref * "}" * } + if$ + } + { " \citeasnoun{" * crossref * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "in {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *} + if$ + } + { "{\em in} \citeasnoun{" crossref * "}" * } + if$ + } + { "{\em in} \citeasnoun{" crossref * "}" * } + if$ + +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.lab.names.abbr} +{ 's := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #1 > + { numnames #2 > + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ " et al." * } + { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ " et al." * } + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ " \& " * + s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.lab.names.full} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " \& " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +INTEGERS { author.field editor.field organization.field title.field key.field } + +FUNCTION {init.field.constants} +{ #0 'author.field := + #1 'editor.field := + #2 'organization.field := + #3 'title.field := + #4 'key.field := +} + +FUNCTION {make.list.label} +{ author.field field.used = + { format.authors } + { editor.field field.used = + { format.editors } + { organization.field field.used = + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + { title.field field.used = + { format.btitle } + { key.field field.used = + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + { "Internal error :001 on " cite$ * " label" * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {make.full.label} +{ author.field field.used = + { author format.lab.names.full } + { editor.field field.used = + { editor format.lab.names.full } + { organization.field field.used = + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + { title.field field.used = + { format.btitle } + { key.field field.used = + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + { "Internal error :001 on " cite$ * " label" * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {make.abbr.label} +{ author.field field.used = + { author format.lab.names.abbr } + { editor.field field.used = + { editor format.lab.names.abbr } + { organization.field field.used = + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + { title.field field.used = + { format.btitle } + { key.field field.used = + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + { "Internal error :001 on " cite$ * " label" * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\harvarditem[" write$ + make.abbr.label write$ + "]{" write$ + make.full.label write$ + "}{" write$ + list.year write$ + "}{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {list.label.output} +{ make.list.label " " * write$ +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title quote "title" output.check } + if$ + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" duplicate$ item.check + pages empty$ + { + output + } + { + " " * + format.vol.num.pages * output + } + if$ + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + author empty$ + { editor "author and editor" item.check } + { crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.edition output + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.book.crossref output.nonnull + format.edition output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title quote "title" output.check } + if$ + howpublished output + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + author empty$ + { editor "author and editor" item.check } + { crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.edition output + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.book.crossref output.nonnull + format.edition output + } + if$ + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + author "author" item.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.edition output + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.chapter.pages output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + author "author" item.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { organization output + publisher output + } + { organization output + publisher output + address output.nonnull + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.pages output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + format.edition output + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address output } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization output + address output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title quote output } + if$ + howpublished output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { title "title" output.check } + if$ + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { skip$ } + { organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + } + { editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + address output.nonnull + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + note "note" output.check + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"January"} + +MACRO {feb} {"February"} + +MACRO {mar} {"March"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"October"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"December"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +EXECUTE {init.field.constants} + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { author.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { editor.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { author.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { organization.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { author.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { organization.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { editor.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.organization.label + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.key.organization.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + make.abbr.label + title.field field.used = + { sort.format.title } + { sortify } + if$ + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ sortify + * + 'sort.label := +} + +FUNCTION {first.presort} +{ calc.label + sort.label + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { " " + * + make.list.label sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {first.presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { last.sort.label next.extra } + +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } + +FUNCTION {initialize.last.extra.num} +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.sort.label sort.label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + sort.label 'last.sort.label := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + year empty$ + { "n.d." extra.label emphasize * 'list.year := } + { year extra.label emphasize * 'list.year := } + if$ + extra.label 'next.extra := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.last.extra.num} + +ITERATE {forward.pass} + +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +FUNCTION {second.presort} +{ make.list.label + title.field field.used = + { sort.format.title } + { sortify } + if$ + " " + * + list.year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {second.presort} + +SORT + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{xx}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/dcu.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/dcu.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..10f3ced486 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/dcu.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1240 @@ +% BibTeX standard bibliography style `dcu' (one of the harvard family) + % version 0.99a for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1991, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, abbrv.bst, agsm.bst, + % dcu.bst or kluwer.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file harvard.tex has the documentation for this style. + +% ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: +% This document is a modified version of alpha.bst to which it owes much of +% its functionality. + +% AUTHOR +% Peter Williams, Key Centre for Design Quality, Sydney University +% e-mail: peterw@archsci.arch.su.oz.au + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + { field.used } + { extra.label sort.label list.year } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t f } + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {item.check} +{ 't := + empty$ + { "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + { skip$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {quote} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "`" swap$ * "'" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + 'f := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr f format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" author format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { " (eds)" * } + { " (ed.)" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors.reverse} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { " (eds)" * } + { " (ed.)" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "Vol." volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series emphasize * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edn" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edn" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp.~" pages n.dashify * } + { "p.~" pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume embolden field.or.null + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ":~" * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { booktitle emphasize } + { "{\em in} " format.editors.reverse * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + key empty$ not and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "in {\em " journal * "\/}" * " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * + } + if$ + } + { " {\em in} \citeasnoun{" crossref * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "in " + } + { "Vol." volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *} + if$ + } + { " \citeasnoun{" * crossref * "}" * } + if$ + } + { " \citeasnoun{" * crossref * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { + key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "in {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *} + if$ + } + { " {\em in} \citeasnoun{" crossref * "}" * } + if$ + } + { " {\em in} \citeasnoun{" crossref * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.lab.names.abbr} +{ 's := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #1 > + { numnames #2 > + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ " et al." * } + { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ " et al." * } + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ " and " * + s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.lab.names.full} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +INTEGERS { author.field editor.field organization.field title.field key.field } + +FUNCTION {init.field.constants} +{ #0 'author.field := + #1 'editor.field := + #2 'organization.field := + #3 'title.field := + #4 'key.field := +} + +FUNCTION {make.list.label} +{ author.field field.used = + { format.authors } + { editor.field field.used = + { format.editors } + { organization.field field.used = + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + { title.field field.used = + { format.btitle } + { key.field field.used = + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + { "Internal error :001 on " cite$ * " label" * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {make.full.label} +{ author.field field.used = + { author format.lab.names.full } + { editor.field field.used = + { editor format.lab.names.full } + { organization.field field.used = + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + { title.field field.used = + { format.btitle } + { key.field field.used = + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + { "Internal error :001 on " cite$ * " label" * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {make.abbr.label} +{ author.field field.used = + { author format.lab.names.abbr } + { editor.field field.used = + { editor format.lab.names.abbr } + { organization.field field.used = + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + { title.field field.used = + { format.btitle } + { key.field field.used = + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + { "Internal error :001 on " cite$ * " label" * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\harvarditem[" write$ + make.abbr.label write$ + "]{" write$ + make.full.label write$ + "}{" write$ + list.year write$ + "}{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {list.label.output} +{ make.list.label " " * write$ +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" duplicate$ item.check + pages empty$ + { + output + } + { + " " * + format.vol.num.pages * output + } + if$ + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + author empty$ + { editor "author and editor" item.check } + { crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.edition output + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.book.crossref output.nonnull + format.edition output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + howpublished output + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + author empty$ + { editor "author and editor" item.check } + { crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.edition output + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.book.crossref output.nonnull + format.edition output + } + if$ + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + author "author" item.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.edition output + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.chapter.pages output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + author "author" item.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { organization output + publisher output + } + { organization output + publisher output + address output.nonnull + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.pages output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + format.edition output + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization output + address output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title emphasize "title" output.check } + if$ + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title output } + if$ + howpublished output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { skip$ } + { organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + } + { editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + address output.nonnull + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + format.tr.number emphasize output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + " (" list.year * ")" * output.nonnull + new.block + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + note "note" output.check + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"January"} + +MACRO {feb} {"February"} + +MACRO {mar} {"March"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"October"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"December"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +EXECUTE {init.field.constants} + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { author.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { editor.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { author.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { organization.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { author.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { organization.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { editor.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.organization.label + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.key.organization.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + make.abbr.label + title.field field.used = + { sort.format.title } + { sortify } + if$ + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ sortify + * + 'sort.label := +} + +FUNCTION {first.presort} +{ calc.label + sort.label + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { " " + * + make.list.label sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {first.presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { last.sort.label next.extra } + +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } + +FUNCTION {initialize.last.extra.num} +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.sort.label sort.label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + sort.label 'last.sort.label := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + year empty$ + { "n.d." extra.label * 'list.year := } + { year extra.label * 'list.year := } + if$ + extra.label 'next.extra := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.last.extra.num} + +ITERATE {forward.pass} + +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +FUNCTION {second.presort} +{ make.list.label + title.field field.used = + { sort.format.title } + { sortify } + if$ + " " + * + list.year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {second.presort} + +SORT + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{xx}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.bib b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.bib new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ea4d27e3e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.bib @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +@BOOK{latex, + author = "Leslie Lamport", + title = "{\LaTeX \rm:} {A} Document Preparation System", + publisher = "Addison-Wesley", + year = 1986 } + +@UNPUBLISHED{btxdoc, + author = "Oren Patashnik", + title = "{{\BibTeX ing}}", + note = "Documentation for general {\BibTeX} users", + month = jan, + year = 1988 } + +@BOOK{agsm, + title = "Style Manual for authors editors and printers of {A}ustralian +government publications", + author = "John Pitson", + publisher = "Australian Government Publishing Service", + address = "Canberra", + edition = "3rd", + year = 1978 } diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.description b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.description new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..66c6569b4a --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.description @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + HARVARD + ------- +The HARVARD package includes the 6 files of Peter Williams' +<peterw@archsci.arch.su.OZ.AU> Harvard family of bibliographic styles. +There are two primary forms of citation in the Harvard style, dependent +upon whether the reference is used as a noun or parenthetically. To +facilitate using a citation as a noun a new command \citeasnoun has been +created which has the same syntax as the \cite command except that multiple +citations are not permitted. Additionally, where there are more than two +authors, all authors are listed in the first citation and in subsequent +citations just the first author's name followed by `et al.' is used. Where +appropriate, citations are abbreviated automatically after the first +reference when bibliographies are produced by BibTeX. Provision is also +made for this feature to be accessed during manual coding. + +There are three bibliography styles currently available within the Harvard +family, AGSM (which is based on "Style Manual for authors editors and +printers of Australian government publications"), DCU (which is based upon +the conventions in use in the Design Computing Unit, Department of +Architectural and Design Science, University of Sydney), and KLUWER (which +aspires to conform to the requirements of Kluwer Academic Publishers). +They are invoked by the \bibliographystyle within LaTeX and effect the +layout of the entries in the bibliography. + +You may retrive the entire package of six files by including the command: + SENDME HARVARD +in the body of a mail message to FILESERV@SHSU.BITNET (FILESERV@SHSU.edu). +If, for some reason, you should only need one file, say, HARVARD.DCU_STY, +include the command: + SENDME HARVARD.DCU_STY +in your request to FILESERV. These files are available for anonymous ftp +retrieval from Niord.SHSU.edu (192.92.115.8) in the directory [.HARVARD]. + +Files in this package: (1 Block = 512 bytes) +File Blocks Save file as: +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +HARVARD.AGSM_BST 46 AGSM.BST +HARVARD.DCU_BST 46 DCU.BST +HARVARD.HARVARD_BIB 2 HARVARD.BIB +HARVARD.HARVARD_STY 6 HARVARD.STY +HARVARD.HARVARD_TEX 13 HARVARD.TEX +HARVARD.KLUWER_BST 46 KLUWER.BST + +Approximate total blocks in full HARVARD package = 159 diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.sty b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.sty new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3fa08b3710 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.sty @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +%% This is a file from Peter Williams' <peterw@archsci.arch.su.OZ.AU> +%% Harvard family of bibliographic styles +\message{harvard bibliography,} + +\def\@hiteml[#1]#2#3#4{\item[]\if@filesw% + { \def\protect##1{\string ##1\space}\immediate% +\write\@auxout{\string\harvardcite{#4}{#2}{#1}{#3}}}\fi% +\protect\hspace*{-\labelwidth}\protect\hspace*{-\labelsep}\ignorespaces} + +\def\@hitem#1#2#3{\item[]\if@filesw% + { \def\protect##1{\string ##1\space}\immediate% +\write\@auxout{\string\harvardcite{#3}{#1}{#1}{#2}}}\fi% +\protect\hspace*{-\labelwidth}\protect\hspace*{-\labelsep}\ignorespaces} + +\def\harvarditem{\@ifnextchar [{\@hiteml}{\@hitem}} + +\def\harvardcite#1#2#3#4{ + \global\@namedef{bhf@#1}{#2} + \global\@namedef{bha@#1}{#3} + \global\@namedef{bhy@#1}{#4}\global\@namedef{b@#1}{\csname bhf@#1\endcsname} +} + +\def\cite{\@ifnextchar [{\@tempswatrue\@citex}{\@tempswafalse\@citex[]}} +\def\citeasnoun{\@ifnextchar [{\@tempswatrue\@citexasnoun} + {\@tempswafalse\@citexasnoun[]} +} + +\def\@enamedef#1{\expandafter\edef\csname #1\endcsname} + +\def\@citex[#1]#2{\if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{#2}}\fi + \def\@citea{}\@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do + {\@citea\def\@citea{\@hisep\penalty\@m\ }\@ifundefined + {b@\@citeb}{{\bf ?}\@warning + {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% +{{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname\@hysep\csname bhy@\@citeb\endcsname}% +\global\@enamedef{b@\@citeb}{\csname bha@\@citeb\endcsname}}% +}}{#1}} + +\def\@citexasnoun[#1]#2{% +\if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{#2}}\fi% +\@citeasnoun{{\@ifundefined% +{b@#2}% +{{\bf ?}\@warning{Citation `#2' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% +{{\csname b@#2\endcsname\ (\csname bhy@#2\endcsname}% +\global\@namedef{b@#2}{\csname bha@#2\endcsname}}% +}}{#1}} + +\gdef\hysep@agsm{\ }\gdef\hisep@agsm{,}% +\gdef\hysep@dcu{, }\gdef\hisep@dcu{;}% +\let\@hysep\hysep@agsm \let\@hisep\hisep@agsm +\def\citationstyle#1{% +\global\@namedef{@hysep}{\csname hysep@#1\endcsname}% +\global\@namedef{@hisep}{\csname hisep@#1\endcsname}} + +%DEFAULT DEFINITIONS +\def\@cite#1#2{({#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi})} +\def\@citeasnoun#1#2{{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi)}} + +% CHANGE \end{document} - to handle double definitions +\def\enddocument{\@checkend{document}\clearpage\begingroup +\if@filesw \immediate\closeout\@mainaux +\def\global\@namedef##1##2{}\def\newlabel{\@testdef r}% +\def\bibcite{\@testdef b}% +\def\harvardcite{\@testbibh}\@tempswafalse \makeatletter\input \jobname.aux +\if@tempswa \@warning{Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get +cross-references right}\fi\fi\endgroup\deadcycles\z@\@@end} + +\def\@testbibh #1#2#3{ + \def\@tempa{#2}\expandafter + \ifx \csname bhf@#1\endcsname \@tempa + \def\@tempa{#3}\expandafter + \ifx \csname bha@#1\endcsname \@tempa + \else \@tempswatrue + \fi + \else + \@tempswatrue + \fi +} + diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.tex b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d7303a3393 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/harvard.tex @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +%% This is a file from Peter Williams' <peterw@archsci.arch.su.OZ.AU> +%% Harvard family of bibliographic styles +\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em + T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}} + +\documentstyle[A4,harvard]{article} +\title{The {\em Harvard} Family of Bibliography Styles} +\author{Peter Williams} +\begin{document} +\bibliographystyle{agsm} +%\citationstyle{agsm} +\maketitle +\section{Introduction} +This document describes the {\em harvard} family of bibliographic styles +which are provided in addition to those described in \citeasnoun{latex} and +\citeasnoun{btxdoc}. This style is primarily intended for use with the +\BibTeX\ bibliographic database management system. However, provision is +also made for hand coding of bibliographies. +\section{Citations} +There are two primary forms of citation in the {\em harvard} style +dependent upon whether the reference is used as a noun or parenthetically. +Additionally, where there are more than two authors, all authors are listed +in the first citation and in subsequent citations just the first author's +name followed by `et al.' is used. The following example from +\citeasnoun{agsm}\ illustrates these points. +\begin{quote} +The major improvement concerns the structure of the interview +(Ulrich~\& Trumbo~1965, p.~112) \ldots . +Later reports (Carlson, Thayer, Mayfield~\& Peterson 1971) record greatly +increased interviewer reliability for structured interviews. Wright (1969, +p.~408) comments that `undoubtedly interviewer skill is directly related to +the validity, quantity and quality of the interview output', and this would +suggest some sort of interviewer training is called for. Rowe (1960), for +example, found that trained interviewers are better able to evaluate +applicants with some measure of reliability. In addition Wexley, Sanders~\& +Yukl (1973) showed that by extensive interviewer training all significant +contrast effects could be eliminated. The results of the 1971 study +(Carlson et al. 1971) are still relevant, but efforts to~\ldots. +\end{quote} + +To facilitate using a citation as a noun a new command {\bf +$\backslash$citeasnoun} has been created which has the same syntax as the +{\bf $\backslash$cite} command except that multiple citations are {\em not} +permitted. The effect of this command is that +\begin{verbatim} +As \citeasnoun{btxdoc} and \citeasnoun[Annex~B]{latex} describe \ldots +\end{verbatim} +produces +\begin{quote} +As \citeasnoun{btxdoc} and \citeasnoun[Annex~B]{latex} describe \ldots +\end{quote} +whereas +\begin{verbatim} +The \BibTeX\ \cite{btxdoc} and \LaTeX\ \cite[Annex~B]{latex} manuals \ldots +\end{verbatim} +produces +\begin{quote} +The \BibTeX\ \cite{btxdoc} and \LaTeX\ \cite[Annex~B]{latex} manuals \ldots +\end{quote} + +Where appropriate, citations are abbreviated automatically after the first +reference when bibliographies are produced by \BibTeX. Provision is also +made for this feature to be accessed during manual coding. + +\section{Styles} +\subsection{Bibliography Styles} +There are three bibliography styles currently available within the {\em +harvard} family, {\bf agsm} (used in this document) which is based on +\citeasnoun[pp.~95--98]{agsm}, {\bf dcu} which is based upon the +conventions in use in the Design Computing Unit, Department of +Architectural and Design Science, University of Sydney and {\bf kluwer} +which aspires to conform to the requirements of Kluwer Academic Publishers. +They are invoked by the {\bf $\backslash$bibliographystyle} as described in +\citeasnoun[p.~74]{latex} and effect the layout of the entries in the +bibliography. + +\subsection{Citation Styles} +There are two citation styles currently available within the {\em harvard} +family, {\bf agsm} (used in this document) and {\bf dcu} which for the +previous example would produce: +\begin{quote}\citationstyle{dcu} +The \BibTeX\ \cite{btxdoc} and \LaTeX\ \cite[Annex~B]{latex} manuals \ldots +\end{quote} +and for multiple citations such as +\begin{verbatim} + The original documentation \cite{btxdoc,latex} say \ldots +\end{verbatim} +the {\bf agsm} citation style produces +\begin{quote}\citationstyle{agsm} +The original documentation \cite{btxdoc,latex} say \ldots +\end{quote} +and the {\bf dcu} citation style produces +\begin{quote}\citationstyle{dcu} +The original documentation \cite{btxdoc,latex} say \ldots +\end{quote} +The default citation style is {\bf agsm} and both styles have no effect on +the appearance of the {\bf $\backslash$citeasnoun} citation format. + +These styles are invoked by the {\bf $\backslash$citationstyle} command, +for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \citationstyle{agsm}. +\end{verbatim} +Because these styles affect the format of parenthetical citations, this +command should appear before any {\bf $\backslash$cite} commands. + +\section{Doing It By Hand} +Hand coding is accomplished much the same as described in +\citeasnoun[p.~73]{latex} except that the new command {\bf +$\backslash$harvarditem} is used in place of {\bf $\backslash$bibitem}. +The syntax of this command is +\begin{quote} +{\bf $\backslash$harvarditem} [{\em abbr-citation}]\{{\em +full-citation}\}\{{\em citation-year}\}\{{\em cite-key}\} +\end{quote} +where +\begin{description} +\item[{\em abbr-citation}] is the (optional) abbreviated citation +(minus the year) to be used in the text +subsequent to the first mention of a particular reference, +\item[{\em full-citation}] is the full citation (minus the year) +to be used in the text +on the first mention of a particular reference, +\item[{\em citation-year}] the year portion of the citation including any +suffices required to disambiguate citations, and +\item[{\em cite-key}] is the key used in the {\bf $\backslash$cite} and +{\bf $\backslash$citeasnoun} commands. +\end{description} + +\section{Acknowledgement} +The motivation for this style came from Fay Sudweeks of the Design Computing +Unit who also originated the formats for the {\bf dcu} style and proofread +their implementation. + +\bibliography{harvard} +\end{document} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/kluwer.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/kluwer.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bdb303082d --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/harvard/kluwer.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1227 @@ +% BibTeX standard bibliography style `kluwer' (one of the harvard family) + % version 0.99a for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1991, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, abbrv.bst, agsm.bst, + % dcu.bst or kluwer.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file harvard.tex has the documentation for this style. + +% ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: +% This document is a modified version of alpha.bst to which it owes much of +% its functionality. + +% AUTHOR +% Peter Williams, Key Centre for Design Quality, Sydney University +% e-mail: peterw@archsci.arch.su.oz.au + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + { field.used } + { extra.label sort.label list.year } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t f } + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {item.check} +{ 't := + empty$ + { "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + { skip$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {quote} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "`" swap$ * "'" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + 'f := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr f format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" author format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { " (eds)" * } + { " (ed.)" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors.reverse} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { " (eds)" * } + { " (ed.)" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "Vol." volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series emphasize * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edn" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edn" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp.~" pages n.dashify * } + { "p.~" pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume embolden field.or.null + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ",~" * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { booktitle emphasize } + { "{\em in} " format.editors.reverse * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + key empty$ not and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "in {\em " journal * "\/}" * " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * + } + if$ + } + { " {\em in} \citeasnoun{" crossref * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "in " + } + { "Vol." volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *} + if$ + } + { " \citeasnoun{" * crossref * "}" * } + if$ + } + { " \citeasnoun{" * crossref * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { + key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "in {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *} + if$ + } + { " {\em in} \citeasnoun{" crossref * "}" * } + if$ + } + { " {\em in} \citeasnoun{" crossref * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.lab.names.abbr} +{ 's := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #1 > + { numnames #2 > + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ " et al." * } + { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ " et al." * } + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ " and " * + s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.lab.names.full} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +INTEGERS { author.field editor.field organization.field title.field key.field } + +FUNCTION {init.field.constants} +{ #0 'author.field := + #1 'editor.field := + #2 'organization.field := + #3 'title.field := + #4 'key.field := +} + +FUNCTION {make.list.label} +{ author.field field.used = + { format.authors } + { editor.field field.used = + { format.editors } + { organization.field field.used = + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + { title.field field.used = + { format.btitle } + { key.field field.used = + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + { "Internal error :001 on " cite$ * " label" * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {make.full.label} +{ author.field field.used = + { author format.lab.names.full } + { editor.field field.used = + { editor format.lab.names.full } + { organization.field field.used = + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + { title.field field.used = + { format.btitle } + { key.field field.used = + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + { "Internal error :001 on " cite$ * " label" * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {make.abbr.label} +{ author.field field.used = + { author format.lab.names.abbr } + { editor.field field.used = + { editor format.lab.names.abbr } + { organization.field field.used = + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } + { title.field field.used = + { format.btitle } + { key.field field.used = + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + { "Internal error :001 on " cite$ * " label" * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\harvarditem[" write$ + make.abbr.label write$ + "]{" write$ + make.full.label write$ + "}{" write$ + list.year write$ + "}{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {list.label.output} +{ make.list.label write$ +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" duplicate$ item.check + pages empty$ + { + output + } + { + " " * + format.vol.num.pages * output + } + if$ + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + author empty$ + { editor "author and editor" item.check } + { crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.edition output + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.book.crossref output.nonnull + format.edition output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + howpublished output + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + author empty$ + { editor "author and editor" item.check } + { crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.edition output + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.book.crossref output.nonnull + format.edition output + } + if$ + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + author "author" item.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.edition output + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.chapter.pages output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + author "author" item.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { organization output + publisher output + } + { organization output + publisher output + address output.nonnull + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.pages output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + format.edition output + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization output + address output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title emphasize "title" output.check } + if$ + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title output } + if$ + howpublished output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.btitle "title" output.check } + if$ + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { skip$ } + { organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + } + { editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + address output.nonnull + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + format.tr.number emphasize output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + list.label.output + ": " list.year * output.nonnull + author "author" item.check + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { format.title "title" output.check } + if$ + note "note" output.check + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"January"} + +MACRO {feb} {"February"} + +MACRO {mar} {"March"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"October"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"December"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +EXECUTE {init.field.constants} + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { author.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { editor.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { author.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { organization.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { author.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { title.field 'field.used := } + { organization.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { key.field 'field.used := } + if$ + } + { editor.field 'field.used := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.organization.label + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.key.organization.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + make.abbr.label + title.field field.used = + { sort.format.title } + { sortify } + if$ + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ sortify + * + 'sort.label := +} + +FUNCTION {first.presort} +{ calc.label + sort.label + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { " " + * + make.list.label sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {first.presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { last.sort.label next.extra } + +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } + +FUNCTION {initialize.last.extra.num} +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.sort.label sort.label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + sort.label 'last.sort.label := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + year empty$ + { "n.d." extra.label * 'list.year := } + { year extra.label * 'list.year := } + if$ + extra.label 'next.extra := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.last.extra.num} + +ITERATE {forward.pass} + +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +FUNCTION {second.presort} +{ make.list.label + title.field field.used = + { sort.format.title } + { sortify } + if$ + " " + * + list.year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title.field field.used = + { skip$ } + { title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {second.presort} + +SORT + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{xx}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2c2a7fae0c --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,630 @@ +# /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/Makefile, Mon Jul 6 12:22:08 1992 +# Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@plot79.math.utah.edu> +#======================================================================= +# UNIX Makefile for BibTeX 0.99 styles. +# +# Major targets: +# +# all prepare .dvi files for every style in the collection +# using test.bib and xampl.bib to illustrate the +# formatting of various BibTeX entries. +# +# ARCHIVE-FILES prepare .tar.z, .zip, and .zoo archive files +# +# DVIFILES-TEST prepare test-*.dvi files +# +# DVIFILES-XAMPL prepare xampl-*.dvi files +# +# PHYSICS-STYLES make ph*.bst files +# +# clean remove all files that can be regenerated by "make all", +# except for the test-*.ltx and xampl-*.ltx test files. +# +# clobber remove all files that can be regenerated by "make all" +# +# There are many other targets for individual files; see the Makefile +# body below. +# +# [06-Jul-1992] +#======================================================================= + +BIBTEX = bibtex + +CHECKSUM = cat >/tmp/bst.2 ; \ + $(HEADER) >/tmp/bst.1 ; \ + cat /tmp/bst.1 /tmp/bst.2 | checksum + +CLEANUP = /bin/rm /tmp/bst.1 /tmp/bst.2 + +CPP = /lib/cpp -P + +COMPRESS = compress + +# DIST-FILES intentionally excludes the btxhak.*, btxdoc.*, and +# bibtex.* files to keep the size of the distribution archive files +# down. It is intended that these archive files contain just that +# material need to use and test the various styles files. + +DELETE-BLANK-LINES = grep -v '^[ ]*$$' + +# sed command to delete lines beginning with one percent sign +DELETE-ONE-PERCENT = /bin/sed -e '/^%$$/d' -e '/^%[^%].*$$/d' + +DIST-FILES = Makefile index *.bib *.bst *.btx *.doc *.ltx *.sty *.readme + +HEADER = (echo "%% =====================================================================" ;\ + echo "%% WARNING: Do NOT edit this file. It was produced automatically by" ;\ + echo "%% $(PERSONALNAME) <$(USER)@`hostname`>" ;\ + echo "%% from `pwd`/xbtxbst.doc " ;\ + echo "%% on `date`" ;\ + echo "%% =====================================================================") + +LATEX = latex + +MV = /bin/mv + +PERSONALNAME = "`ypcat passwd | grep '^'$(USER)':' | awk -F: '{print $$5}'`" + +RM = /bin/rm -f + +SED = /bin/sed + +SHELL = /bin/sh + +STYLE = plain + +STYLES = aaai-named abbrv abstract acm agsm alpha amsalpha \ + amsplain annotate annotation apa apalike apalike2 \ + astron authordate1 authordate2 authordate3 authordate4 \ + bbs cbe cell dcu humanbio humannat ieeetr is-abbrv \ + is-alpha is-plain is-unsrt jbact jmb jtb kluwer named \ + namunsrt nar nature newapa phaip phapalik phcpc phiaea \ + phjcp phnf phnflet phpf phppcf phreport phrmp plain \ + plainyr siam unsrt + +TAR = tar + +UNZIP = unzip + +ZIP = zip + +ZOO = zoo + +#======================================================================= + +.SUFFIXES: + +.SUFFIXES: .dvi .ltx + +.ltx.dvi: + $(LATEX) $< + $(BIBTEX) $* + $(LATEX) $< + $(LATEX) $< + +#======================================================================= + +all: AUTHORDATE DVIFILES-TEST DVIFILES-XAMPL + +ARCHIVE-FILES: bstfiles.tar.z bstfiles.tar-lst bstfiles.zip-lst bstfiles.zoo-lst + $(RM) bstfiles.tar + +AUTHORDATE: authordate1.dvi authordate2.dvi authordate3.dvi authordate4.dvi + +authordate1.dvi: authordate1.ltx test.bib testadb.ltx + +authordate2.dvi: authordate2.ltx test.bib testadb.ltx + +authordate3.dvi: authordate3.ltx test.bib testadb.ltx + +authordate4.dvi: authordate4.ltx test.bib testadb.ltx + +bstfiles.tar: $(DIST-FILES) + $(RM) $@ + $(TAR) cf $@ $(DIST-FILES) + +bstfiles.tar-lst: bstfiles.tar + $(TAR) tvf bstfiles.tar >$@ + +bstfiles.tar.z: bstfiles.tar + $(COMPRESS) <bstfiles.tar >bstfiles.tar.z + +bstfiles.zip: $(DIST-FILES) + $(RM) $@ + $(ZIP) $@ $(DIST-FILES) + +bstfiles.zip-lst: bstfiles.zip + $(UNZIP) -v bstfiles.zip >$@ + +bstfiles.zoo: $(DIST-FILES) + $(RM) $@ + $(ZOO) a $@ $(DIST-FILES) + +bstfiles.zoo-lst: bstfiles.zoo + $(ZOO) v bstfiles.zoo >$@ + +clean: + -$(RM) *.aux + -$(RM) *.blg + -$(RM) *.dvi + -$(RM) *.log + -$(RM) *~ + -$(RM) \#* + -$(RM) a.out + -$(RM) core + -$(RM) authordate*.bbl + -$(RM) test-*.bbl + -$(RM) xampl-*.bbl + -$(RM) bstfiles.tar* bstfiles.zip* bstfiles.zoo* + +clobber: clean + -$(RM) test-*.ltx + -$(RM) xampl-*.ltx + +DVIFILES-TEST: + for f in $(STYLES) ; \ + do \ + make STYLE=$$f test-$$f.dvi ;\ + done + +DVIFILES-XAMPL: + for f in $(STYLES) ; \ + do \ + make STYLE=$$f xampl-$$f.dvi ;\ + done + +is-abbrv.bst: xbtxbst.doc + $(CPP) -DABBRV xbtxbst.doc | \ + $(DELETE-ONE-PERCENT) -e 's/"xbtxbst.doc"/"is-abbrv.bst"/' | \ + $(CHECKSUM) >is-abbrv.bst + $(CLEANUP) + +is-alpha.bst: xbtxbst.doc + $(CPP) -DALPHA xbtxbst.doc | \ + $(DELETE-ONE-PERCENT) -e 's/"xbtxbst.doc"/"is-alpha.bst"/' | \ + $(CHECKSUM) >is-alpha.bst + $(CLEANUP) + +is-plain.bst: xbtxbst.doc + $(CPP) -DPLAIN xbtxbst.doc | \ + $(DELETE-ONE-PERCENT) -e 's/"xbtxbst.doc"/"is-plain.bst"/' | \ + $(CHECKSUM) >is-plain.bst + $(CLEANUP) + +is-unsrt.bst: xbtxbst.doc + $(CPP) -DUNSRT xbtxbst.doc | \ + $(DELETE-ONE-PERCENT) -e 's/"xbtxbst.doc"/"is-unsrt.bst"/' | \ + $(CHECKSUM) >is-unsrt.bst + $(CLEANUP) + +phaip.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DAIP <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phaip.bst + +phapalik.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DAPALIKE <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phapalik.bst + +phcpc.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DCPC <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phcpc.bst + +phiaea.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DIAEA <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phiaea.bst + +phjcp.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DJCP <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phjcp.bst + +phnf.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DNF <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phnf.bst + +phnflet.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DNFLET <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phnflet.bst + +phpf.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DPF <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phpf.bst + +phppcf.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DPPCF <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phppcf.bst + +phreport.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DREPORT <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phreport.bst + +phrmp.bst: phyjfull.btx physics.btx + $(CPP) -DRMP <physics.btx | $(DELETE-BLANK-LINES) >phrmp.bst + +PHYSICS-STYLES: phaip.bst phapalik.bst phcpc.bst phiaea.bst phjcp.bst \ + phnf.bst phnflet.bst phpf.bst phppcf.bst phreport.bst \ + phrmp.bst + +test-$(STYLE).ltx: test.ltx $(STYLE).bst + $(SED) -e 's/{plain}/{'$(STYLE)'}/g' <test.ltx >test-$(STYLE).ltx + +# Special rules for styles that require an additional LaTeX style option: + +test-aaai-named.dvi: aaai-named.bst test.ltx authordate1-4.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[authordate1-4]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'aaai-named'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-aaai-named.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-aaai-named.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-aaai-named.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-aaai-named + $(LATEX) test-aaai-named.ltx + $(LATEX) test-aaai-named.ltx + +test-agsm.dvi: agsm.bst test.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[harvard]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'agsm'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-agsm.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-agsm.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-agsm.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-agsm + $(LATEX) test-agsm.ltx + $(LATEX) test-agsm.ltx + +test-apa.dvi: apa.bst test.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'apa'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-apa.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-apa.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-apa.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-apa + $(LATEX) test-apa.ltx + $(LATEX) test-apa.ltx + +test-astron.dvi: astron.bst test.ltx astron/astron.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'astron'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-astron.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-astron.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-astron.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-astron + $(LATEX) test-astron.ltx + $(LATEX) test-astron.ltx + +test-authordate1.dvi: authordate1.bst test.ltx authordate1-4.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[authordate1-4]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'authordate1'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-authordate1.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-authordate1.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-authordate1.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-authordate1 + $(LATEX) test-authordate1.ltx + $(LATEX) test-authordate1.ltx + +test-authordate2.dvi: authordate2.bst test.ltx authordate1-4.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[authordate1-4]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'authordate2'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-authordate2.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-authordate2.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-authordate2.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-authordate2 + $(LATEX) test-authordate2.ltx + $(LATEX) test-authordate2.ltx + +test-authordate3.dvi: authordate3.bst test.ltx authordate1-4.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[authordate1-4]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'authordate3'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-authordate3.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-authordate3.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-authordate3.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-authordate3 + $(LATEX) test-authordate3.ltx + $(LATEX) test-authordate3.ltx + +test-authordate4.dvi: authordate4.bst test.ltx authordate1-4.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[authordate1-4]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'authordate4'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-authordate4.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-authordate4.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-authordate4.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-authordate4 + $(LATEX) test-authordate4.ltx + $(LATEX) test-authordate4.ltx + +test-bbs.dvi: bbs.bst test.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'bbs'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-bbs.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-bbs.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-bbs.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-bbs + $(LATEX) test-bbs.ltx + $(LATEX) test-bbs.ltx + +test-cbe.dvi: cbe.bst test.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'cbe'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-cbe.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-cbe.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-cbe.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-cbe + $(LATEX) test-cbe.ltx + $(LATEX) test-cbe.ltx + +test-dcu.dvi: dcu.bst test.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[harvard]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'dcu'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-dcu.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-dcu.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-dcu.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-dcu + $(LATEX) test-dcu.ltx + $(LATEX) test-dcu.ltx + +test-humanbio.dvi: humanbio.bst test.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'humanbio'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-humanbio.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-humanbio.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-humanbio.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-humanbio + $(LATEX) test-humanbio.ltx + $(LATEX) test-humanbio.ltx + +test-humannat.dvi: humannat.bst test.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'humannat'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-humannat.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-humannat.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-humannat.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-humannat + $(LATEX) test-humannat.ltx + $(LATEX) test-humannat.ltx + +test-jmb.dvi: jmb.bst test.ltx jmb.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[jmb]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'jmb'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-jmb.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-jmb.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-jmb.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-jmb + $(LATEX) test-jmb.ltx + $(LATEX) test-jmb.ltx + +test-jtb.dvi: jtb.bst test.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'jtb'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-jtb.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-jtb.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-jtb.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-jtb + $(LATEX) test-jtb.ltx + $(LATEX) test-jtb.ltx + +test-kluwer.dvi: kluwer.bst test.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[harvard]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'kluwer'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-kluwer.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-kluwer.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-kluwer.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-kluwer + $(LATEX) test-kluwer.ltx + $(LATEX) test-kluwer.ltx + +test-named.dvi: named.bst named.sty test.ltx + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[named]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'named'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-named.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-named.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-named.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-named + $(LATEX) test-named.ltx + $(LATEX) test-named.ltx + +test-nar.dvi: nar.bst test.ltx nar.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[nar]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'nar'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-nar.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-nar.ltx . + $(LATEX) test-nar.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-nar + $(LATEX) test-nar.ltx + $(LATEX) test-nar.ltx + +test-newapa.dvi: newapa.bst newapa.sty test.ltx apalike.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[apalike,newapa]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'newapa'}/g' \ + <test.ltx >/tmp/test-newapa.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/test-newapa.ltx . + @echo ============================================================ + @echo Expect BibTeX and LaTeX errors here: newapa.bst does not + @echo correctly handle some of the entries in test.bib. A solution + @echo has yet to be identified. + @echo ============================================================ + $(LATEX) test-newapa.ltx + $(BIBTEX) test-newapa + $(LATEX) test-newapa.ltx + $(LATEX) test-newapa.ltx + +xampl-$(STYLE).ltx: xampl.ltx $(STYLE).bst + $(SED) -e 's/{plain}/{'$(STYLE)'}/g' <xampl.ltx >xampl-$(STYLE).ltx + +# Special rules for styles that require an additional LaTeX style option: + +xampl-aaai-named.dvi: aaai-named.bst xampl.ltx authordate1-4.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[authordate1-4]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'aaai-named'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-aaai-named.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-aaai-named.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-aaai-named.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-aaai-named + $(LATEX) xampl-aaai-named.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-aaai-named.ltx + +xampl-agsm.dvi: agsm.bst xampl.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[harvard]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'agsm'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-agsm.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-agsm.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-agsm.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-agsm + $(LATEX) xampl-agsm.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-agsm.ltx + +xampl-apa.dvi: apa.bst xampl.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'apa'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-apa.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-apa.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-apa.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-apa + $(LATEX) xampl-apa.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-apa.ltx + +xampl-astron.dvi: astron.bst xampl.ltx astron/astron.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'astron'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-astron.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-astron.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-astron.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-astron + $(LATEX) xampl-astron.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-astron.ltx + +xampl-authordate1.dvi: authordate1.bst xampl.ltx authordate1-4.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[authordate1-4]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'authordate1'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-authordate1.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-authordate1.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate1.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-authordate1 + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate1.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate1.ltx + +xampl-authordate2.dvi: authordate2.bst xampl.ltx authordate1-4.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[authordate1-4]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'authordate2'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-authordate2.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-authordate2.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate2.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-authordate2 + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate2.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate2.ltx + +xampl-authordate3.dvi: authordate3.bst xampl.ltx authordate1-4.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[authordate1-4]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'authordate3'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-authordate3.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-authordate3.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate3.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-authordate3 + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate3.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate3.ltx + +xampl-authordate4.dvi: authordate4.bst xampl.ltx authordate1-4.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[authordate1-4]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'authordate4'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-authordate4.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-authordate4.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate4.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-authordate4 + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate4.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-authordate4.ltx + +xampl-bbs.dvi: bbs.bst xampl.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'bbs'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-bbs.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-bbs.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-bbs.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-bbs + $(LATEX) xampl-bbs.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-bbs.ltx + +xampl-cbe.dvi: cbe.bst xampl.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'cbe'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-cbe.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-cbe.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-cbe.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-cbe + $(LATEX) xampl-cbe.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-cbe.ltx + +xampl-dcu.dvi: dcu.bst xampl.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[harvard]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'dcu'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-dcu.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-dcu.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-dcu.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-dcu + $(LATEX) xampl-dcu.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-dcu.ltx + +xampl-humanbio.dvi: humanbio.bst xampl.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'humanbio'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-humanbio.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-humanbio.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-humanbio.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-humanbio + $(LATEX) xampl-humanbio.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-humanbio.ltx + +xampl-humannat.dvi: humannat.bst xampl.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'humannat'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-humannat.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-humannat.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-humannat.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-humannat + $(LATEX) xampl-humannat.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-humannat.ltx + +xampl-jmb.dvi: jmb.bst xampl.ltx jmb.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[jmb]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'jmb'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-jmb.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-jmb.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-jmb.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-jmb + $(LATEX) xampl-jmb.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-jmb.ltx + +xampl-jtb.dvi: jtb.bst xampl.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[astron]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'jtb'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-jtb.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-jtb.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-jtb.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-jtb + $(LATEX) xampl-jtb.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-jtb.ltx + +xampl-kluwer.dvi: kluwer.bst xampl.ltx harvard.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[harvard]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'kluwer'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-kluwer.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-kluwer.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-kluwer.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-kluwer + $(LATEX) xampl-kluwer.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-kluwer.ltx + +xampl-named.dvi: named.bst named.sty xampl.ltx + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[named]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'named'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-named.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-named.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-named.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-named + $(LATEX) xampl-named.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-named.ltx + +xampl-nar.dvi: nar.bst xampl.ltx nar.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[nar]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'nar'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-nar.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-nar.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-nar.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-nar + $(LATEX) xampl-nar.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-nar.ltx + +xampl-newapa.dvi: newapa.bst newapa.sty xampl.ltx apalike.sty + $(SED) -e 's/\\documentstyle\[\]/\\documentstyle[apalike,newapa]/g' \ + -e 's/{plain}/{'newapa'}/g' \ + <xampl.ltx >/tmp/xampl-newapa.ltx + $(MV) /tmp/xampl-newapa.ltx . + $(LATEX) xampl-newapa.ltx + $(BIBTEX) xampl-newapa + $(LATEX) xampl-newapa.ltx + $(LATEX) xampl-newapa.ltx diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile.tops20 b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile.tops20 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b81d6f5643 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile.tops20 @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +#======================================================================= +# Makefile for BibTeX 0.99 +# [14-Nov-88] +#======================================================================= + +.SUFFIXES: + +.SUFFIXES: .web .dvi .tex .ltx + +.tex.dvi: + latex $*\n + bibtex $* + delete $*.dvi + latex $*\n + delete $*.dvi + latex $* + +.ltx.dvi: + latex $*.ltx\n + bibtex $* + delete $*.dvi + latex $*.ltx\n + delete $*.dvi + latex $*.ltx\n + +.web.dvi: + delete $*.dvi + delete $*.tex + weave\n\ + $*.web\n\ + $*.tops20-changes\n\ + $*.tex + tex $*\n + delete $*.tex + +.web.exe: + tangle\n\ + $*.web\n\ + $*.tops20-changes\n\ + $*.pas\n\ + $*.pool + load $*.pas + save $* + delete $*.pas + delete $*.rel + +all: bibtex.exe document + +install: + copy bibtex.exe tex:bibtex.exe + +bibtex.exe: bibtex.web bibtex.tops20-changes + +document: btxdoc.dvi btxhak.dvi bibtex.dvi diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile.tops20-new b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile.tops20-new new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b04eaf1d97 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile.tops20-new @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +#======================================================================= +# Makefile for BibTeX 0.99 +# In order to allow BibTeX 0.98 to continue to exist, the executable +# program created here is called nbibtex. +# [12-May-88] +#======================================================================= + +.SUFFIXES: + +.SUFFIXES: .web .dvi .tex .ltx + +.tex.dvi: + latex $*\n + bibtex $* + delete $*.dvi + latex $*\n + delete $*.dvi + latex $* + +.ltx.dvi: + latex $*.ltx\n + bibtex $* + delete $*.dvi + latex $*.ltx\n + delete $*.dvi + latex $*.ltx\n + +.web.dvi: + delete $*.dvi + delete $*.tex + weave\n\ + $*.web\n\ + $*.tops20-changes\n\ + $*.tex + tex $*\n + delete $*.tex + +.web.exe: + tangle\n\ + $*.web\n\ + $*.tops20-changes\n\ + $*.pas\n\ + $*.pool + load $*.pas + save $* + delete $*.pas + delete $*.rel + +all: bibtex.exe document + +install: + copy bibtex.exe tex:nbibtex.exe + +bibtex.exe: bibtex.web bibtex.tops20-changes + +document: btxdoc.dvi btxhak.dvi bibtex.dvi diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile.vms b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile.vms new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b4c7bf8111 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/makefile/makefile.vms @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +#======================================================================= +# Makefile for BibTeX 0.99 +# In order to allow BibTeX 0.98 to continue to exist, the executable +# program created here is called nbibtex; it should be installed in +# a standard place, and a system-wide foreign command symbol created +# for it. +# [12-May-88] +#======================================================================= + +.SUFFIXES: +.SUFFIXES: .exe .dvi .web .tex .ltx + +.tex.dvi: + latex $* + nbibtex $* + - delete $*.dvi.* + latex $* + - delete $*.dvi.* + latex $* + +.ltx.dvi: + latex $*.ltx + nbibtex $* + - delete $*.dvi.* + latex $*.ltx + - delete $*.dvi.* + latex $* + +.web.dvi: + - delete $*.dvi.* + - delete $*.tex.* + copy $*.vms-changes $*.ch + weave $* + tex $* + - delete $*.tex.* + +.web.exe: + copy $*.vms-changes $*.ch + tangle $* + pascal $*/nolist/nowarn + link $*,[--.tex]prompt + - delete $*.ch.* + - delete $*.pas.* + - delete $*.obj.* + +all: nbibtex.exe document + +nbibtex.exe: bibtex.exe + copy bibtex.exe.* nbibtex.exe.* + +bibtex.exe: bibtex.web bibtex.vms-changes + + +document: btxdoc.dvi btxhak.dvi bibtex.dvi + diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/cell.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/cell.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4d831b7a61 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/cell.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1442 @@ +% BibTex `cell' bibliography style +% version = 1.25 of cell.bst 1994 October 15 +% from version = 1.27 of jmb.bst 1992 October 22 + +% conversion from JMB to Cell by: +% changing emphasis to roman (\em to \rm) +% bold face to roman (\bf to \rm) (on volume) +% making the volume be italics +% removing the comma after the journal name +% +% Thomas Schneider +% National Cancer Institute +% Laboratory of Mathematical Biology +% Frederick, Maryland 21702-1013 +% toms@ncifcrf.gov +% +% This file is available by anonymous ftp from ncifcrf.gov in pub/delila. +% +% TITLES can be turned on and off! +% Just nocite the reference TitlesOn in the paper (i.e. \nocite{TitlesOn}) +% and have a bibliography article in your database with that cite key! +% +% WARNING: Since I use mostly article, book and inproceedings, these +% are formatted pretty closely to the Journal of Theoretical Biology style +% while other things are neglected. Also, I can't guarantee that the style +% is exactly right. +% +% The following documentation is identical from the source of jmb.bst, +% which was the apalike.bst taken from the Clarkson archive on 1989 June 19. +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% BibTeX `apalike' bibliography style (24-Jan-88 version) +% Adapted from the `alpha' style, version 0.99a; for BibTeX version 0.99a. +% Copyright (C) 1988, all rights reserved. +% Copying of this file is allowed, provided that if you make any changes at all +% you name it something other than `apalike.bst'. +% This restriction helps ensure that all copies are identical. +% Differences between this style and `alpha' are generally heralded by a `%'. +% The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for alpha.bst. +% +% This style should be used with the `apalike' LaTeX style (apalike.sty). +% \cite's come out like "(Jones, 1986)" in the text but there are no labels +% in the bibliography, and something like "(1986)" comes out immediately +% after the author. Author (and editor) names appear as last name, comma, +% initials. A `year' field is required for every entry, and so is either +% an author (or in some cases, an editor) field or a key field. +% +% Editorial note: +% Many journals require a style like `apalike', but I strongly, strongly, +% strongly recommend that you not use it if you have a choice---use something +% like `plain' instead. Mary-Claire van Leunen (A Handbook for Scholars, +% Knopf, 1979) argues convincingly that a style like `plain' encourages better +% writing than one like `apalike'. Furthermore the strongest arguments for +% using an author-date style like `apalike'---that it's "the most practical" +% (The Chicago Manual of Style, University of Chicago Press, thirteenth +% edition, 1982, pages 400--401)---fall flat on their face with the new +% computer-typesetting technology. For instance page 401 anachronistically +% states "The chief disadvantage of [a style like `plain'] is that additions +% or deletions cannot be made after the manuscript is typed without changing +% numbers in both text references and list." LaTeX sidesteps the disadvantage. +% +% History: +% 15-sep-86 (SK,OP) Original version, by Susan King and Oren Patashnik. +% 10-nov-86 (OP) Truncated the sort.key$ string to the correct length +% in bib.sort.order to eliminate error message. +% 24-jan-88 (OP) Updated for BibTeX version 0.99a, from alpha.bst 0.99a; +% apalike now sorts by author, then year, then title; +% THIS `apalike' VERSION DOES NOT WORK WITH BIBTEX 0.98i. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% The program was further modified by Tom Schneider: +% +% 1989 June 19 (TDS) Renamed jmb.bst. Items that do not have years were +% listed in the bibliography without identifiers. However, they +% have identifiers in the text. The identifier was added. +% Titles were removed :-(. +% +% 1989 October 2 (TDS) Made labels in the paper use the & symbol rather +% than `and', as required by JMB. +% 1989 October 3 (TDS) Made et~al. be in italics. +% Removed comma after journal name. (actually, all +% mid sentence commas go!) +% Made volume number be bold faced. +% Converted colon (:) after volume number to a comma (,). +% If a journal name does NOT end in a period, add +% a comma after the name. +% 1989 October 14 (TDS) Without a year the program used to sort on the +% title. I made it sort on the cite$ if there is no year. +% 1989 October 18 (TDS) If there is one reference without a year, put +% an "a" at the end of its label, so that it comes out +% as (Smith, a) in the text. in FUNCTION {forward.pass} +% 1989 November 2 (TDS) Unpublished papers now give the title. +% 1989 November 18 (TDS) TITLES can be turned on and off! +% Just nocite the reference TitlesOn in the paper +% and have a bibliography article in your database +% with that cite key! +% 1989 December 5 (TDS) I can't stand sorting to fall back on the +% titles of the article - no control! So in function +% bib.sort.order the default is now cite$. +% 1990 November 14 (TDS) Changes to match JTB better: +% Names in the bibliography are now connected +% with "\&" instead of "and", since this fits JTB better. +% "In" is now "In:". +% "editors" and "editor" are now "eds" and "ed". +% booktitle follows editors. editors in parenthesis. +% pp. and p. instead of pages and page. +% location followed by colon (:) and then publisher. +% 1992 October 22 (TDS) Publisher address is at the end of books. +% with no colon after address. +% no comma before & in name list in bibliography. +% The extra.label (as the a of 1991a) is emphasized. +% "In:" goes back to "In"! +% publisher address is at the end of inproceedings. +% volume is "vol.", with comma after number. +% ed.", and comma after ) closing editors. +% as a colon (:), JMB does NOT want the next +% ed, but the format.title function uses +% which leaves it capitalized. To fix this, a +% place change.case$ must be written. +% +% When a title has a colon (:), JMB does NOT want the next +% word capitalized, but the format.title function uses +% change.case$, which leaves it capitalized. To fix this, a +% function to replace change.case$ was written: +% special.change.case +% +% edition should follow TITLE for books! + +% possible bug: sorting order probably should be first author followed +% by year; but this is not absolutely clear. Sorting here is (I think) +% by all authors (or perhaps the key) then year. + + +ENTRY % declare variables that have a value for each entry on the list + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key +% month not used in apalike + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + {} + { label extra.label sort.label } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block + docomma givetitles } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := + + #0 'docomma := % if it is 0 then don't do commas, otherwise do them. +} + +FUNCTION {init.toggle.switches} +{% set switches for controlling the output! + #0 'givetitles := % if it is 0 then don't give titles, otherwise do them. +} + +STRINGS { s t } + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = +% "in of output.nonnull" warning$ + +% % { ", " * write$ } % the comma here is responsible for every comma! +% % % But JMB doesn't want commas, so away it goes! +% { " " * write$ } % That does it! + + { % doing a comma is controlled specifically in JMB using docomma + docomma #0 = + { " " * write$ } + { ", " * write$ } + if$ + } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +% "out of output.nonnull" warning$ +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := +% "in output.check" warning$ + duplicate$ empty$ + { t "title" = + { pop$ } % jmb ignores titles and does not object if missing + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ + } + 'output.nonnull % block periods + % { pop$ } % don't do anything + if$ +% "ouT of output.check" warning$ +} + +% t "title" = +% { "zowie" warning$ } +% { duplicate$ empty$ +% { pop$ "EmPtY " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } +% 'output.nonnull +% } +% if$ +% if$ +%} + +% apalike needs this function because +% the year has special punctuation; +% apalike ignores the month +FUNCTION {output.year.check} +{ year empty$ + { + "empty year in " cite$ ", using label: " extra.label * * * warning$ + write$ +% " (" extra.label * ")" * % TDS UNemphasized label + +% zzz here is the problem: +% extra.label "BLURB" * warning$ + " ({\rm{" extra.label * "}})" * % TDS emphasized label +% "BLORB" warning$ + + { label "{\rm{" extra.label "}}" * * * 'label :=} +% "BLUBEL" warning$ + + mid.sentence 'output.state := +% "BLIP" warning$ + } + { write$ + +% " (" year * extra.label * ")" * % TDS UNemphasized label + " (" year * "{\rm{" extra.label "}}" * * * ")" * % TDS emphasized label + + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ +% "POW" warning$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\rm " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > +% { "," * } % remove this comma TDS + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " {\rm et~al.}" * } + { " \& " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.key} % this function is just for apalike +{ empty$ + { key field.or.null } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", eds" * } % TDS + { ", ed." * } % TDS + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {special.change.case} +% change the entire string to lower case except +% for the first letter and things inside {} +% That is, force the first letter after a colon (:) to be lower case +% but otherwise use the change.case$ rules. +{ +% title "t" change.case$ % TDS this line was the original method + +% start with the first letter of the title, hang on stack +title #1 #1 substring$ + +% unearth this to see the breakpoint +%"|---|" * + +% take the title, change to entire lower case. +title "l" change.case$ + +% take from second position of lowered title to end of title +#2 +global.max$ +substring$ + +% concatenate first letter to rest of title +* +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { % decide whether to give the title or not + givetitles #1 = +% { title "t" change.case$ } % produce the title % TDS original function + { special.change.case } % produce the title + { title pop$ "" } % don't produce the title + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } +% { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect % TDS + { "vol." volume "," * tie.or.space.connect % made vol. + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ +% "volume and number" number either.or.check % TDS + "vol. and num." number either.or.check % made vol. + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } % TDS + { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } % TDS + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ "{\rm " volume "}" * * field.or.null % make volume bold face + +% cell does not take numbers +% number empty$ +% 'skip$ +%% { " (" number * ")" * * +% { " ({\em " number "\/}" * * ")" * * % CELL IS ITALICS +%% zzz +% volume empty$ +% { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } +% 'skip$ +% if$ +% } +% if$ + + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } +% { ":" * pages n.dashify * } % no more colons after the volume + { ", " * pages n.dashify * } % comma's instead + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "In " booktitle emphasize * } % TDS + { "In " booktitle emphasize * ", " * % That's the comma after the title + "(" format.editors ")," * * * } % TDS + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ "In" % this is for apalike % TDS + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " % TDS + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * % this is for apalike +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ "In" % this is for apalike % TDS + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ + cite$ "TitlesOn" = + 'skip$ % Don't write out an article of this kind, it's a toggle switch! + { + output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for +% "===> about to" warning$ + output.year.check % apalike +% "===> after it" warning$ + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { % figure out the last character of the journal name. + % "<<" journal #-1 #1 substring$ ">>" * * % for testing + % "<" journal ">" * * % this works ok % for testing + + journal #-1 #1 substring$ "." = + { journal } % journal ended in period so don't do anything +% { journal ", " *} % journal ended without period, so add comma + { journal " " *} % journal ended without period, so add comma NONE FOR CELL + if$ + emphasize "journal" output.check + +% journal * emphasize "journal" output.check % the original method + + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + output.year.check % special for apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + #1 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS ON FOR JMB + crossref missing$ + { + format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + format.edition output % TDS JMB position for edition +% new.sentence +% #0 'docomma := % no comma after address +% address ":" * output % TDS + publisher "publisher" output.check % TDS +% #1 'docomma := % comma back on +% publisher "publisher" output.check +% address output + address output % TDS - no colon! + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ +% format.edition output % TDS original position of edition + new.block + note output + fin.entry + #0 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS OFF +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + howpublished output + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + output.year.check % special for apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + #0 'docomma := % no comma after address + address ":" * output % TDS + publisher "publisher" output.check % TDS + #1 'docomma := % comma back on +% publisher "publisher" output.check +% address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { +% #1 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS ON FOR JMB, BUT NOT FOR JTB: inconsistent. TDS NOW + format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages + pages empty$ + { output } + { "," * output } % TDS toss in comma instead of period + if$ + +% address output % TDS address is below for JTB +% new.sentence % TDS remove period + organization output + #0 'docomma := % NO COMMA AFTER ADDRESS + publisher "publisher" output.check % TDS + #1 'docomma := % comma back on + +% publisher output % are simpler + address output % TDS + #0 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS OFF + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title output + new.block + howpublished output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis," format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.editors output + editor format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address output % for apalike + new.sentence % we always output + organization output % a nonempty organization + publisher output % here + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for +% "===> about to unpuBLISH" warning$ + output.year.check % apalike +% "===> out of to unpuBLISH" warning$ + new.block +% "===> PLEASE PLEASE BE HERE" warning$ + +% Since format.title is out of commission, the original method won't work: +% format.title "title" output.check +% so do the equivalent of the format.title procedure: (TDS) + title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } % produce the title + if$ +% "===> perfidity 1" warning$ + "title" output.check +% "===> perfidity" warning$ + + new.block + note "note" output.check + fin.entry + +% "===> GOlly done" warning$ +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"January"} + +MACRO {feb} {"February"} + +MACRO {mar} {"March"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"October"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"December"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +% *********************************************************** + +FUNCTION {check.for.titlecommand} +% go through each entry and see if one of them has the key +% 'TitlesOn'. If this is found, then do titles! +% 1989 November 18 TDS +{ +% "|" label "|" * * write$ newline$ % |Arrhenius {\rm et~al.}, 1986| +% "|" cite$ "|" * * write$ newline$ % |Arrhenius1986| +% so cite$ is the thing I want to detect... + + cite$ "TitlesOn" = + { % got it! +% "FOUND TitlesOn" write$ newline$ + "Titles Will Be Printed" warning$ + #1 'givetitles := % give titles! + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +EXECUTE {init.toggle.switches} +ITERATE {check.for.titlecommand} +% *********************************************************** + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +% There are three apalike cases: one person (Jones), +% two (Jones and de~Bruijn), and more (Jones et~al.). +% This function is much like format.crossref.editors. +% +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := + s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + s num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " {\rm et~al.}" * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " {\rm et~al.}" * } + { " \& " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + % note new use of & rather than `and'. TDS + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key % apalike uses the whole key + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key % apalike uses the whole key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key % apalike uses the whole key, no organization + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.label % apalike ignores organization + 'author.key.label % for labeling and sorting + if$ + } + if$ + ", " % these three lines are + * % for apalike, which + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ % uses all four digits + * + 'label := +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ % apalike uses initials + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := % <= here + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "{\rm et al}" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +% apalike uses two sorting passes; the first one sets the +% labels so that the `a's, `b's, etc. can be computed; +% the second pass puts the references in "correct" order. +% The presort function is for the first pass. It computes +% label, sort.label, and title, and then concatenates. +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + label sortify + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ % for + 'sort.label := % apalike + sort.label % style + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT % by label, sort.label, title---for final label calculation + +STRINGS { last.label next.extra } % apalike labels are only for the text; + +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } % there are none in the bibliography + +FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} % and hence there is no `longest.label' +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +% pass through the references forward +{ +%"\\ label=" label "//" * * write$ newline$ % display the label +%"\\last.label=" last.label "//" * * write$ newline$ % display the label + + last.label label = % if the label repeats the previous label... + { % then increment the extra number + last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + % and convert it to a label + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { % else set things up for the next entry + "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + + % However, if the year was missing, tack on an extra "a". TDS + year empty$ + {"a" 'extra.label :=} + {"" 'extra.label :=} + if$ + +% "" 'extra.label := % the original method was not to do anything TDS + + label 'last.label := % capture this label for next time + } + if$ +%"\\extra.label = " extra.label "//" * * write$ newline$ % display the label +} + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +% pass through the references backwards +% add extra characters to the end of the label string +{ +%"{{" label "}}" * * write$ newline$ % display the label + next.extra "b" = +% original logic: + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + +% next.extra "b" = { "next.extra was = b" write$ newline$} 'skip$ if$ + +% new as of 1989 Oct 18 +% { "a" 'extra.label := } +% { % Put on an "a" at the end of the label if the year is missing. TDS +% year empty$ +% { "a" 'extra.label := } +% %{ label "a" * 'label := } +% 'skip$ % otherwise leave it alone (orignial method) +% if$ } +% if$ + +% label extra.label * 'label := % TDS ORIGINAL LABEL METHOD + +% stick {\rm } around extra.label if it's not empty TDS + extra.label "" = + 'skip$ + { label "{\rm{" extra.label "}}" * * * 'label :=} + if$ + + extra.label 'next.extra := +%"{{" label "}}" * * write$ newline$ % display the label +} + +FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} +% Generate the sort.key$ variables for sorting. +% The sorting is first on the sort.label (ie, author's name), followed +% by the year then the title. If there is no year, the cite$ is used. +{ + sort.label % this is based on the author name + " " * % tack on some space +% original apa command was to use the year or an empty string: +% year field.or.null sortify +% +% Replace that with the use of the cite$, when there is no year: + year duplicate$ empty$ + {pop$ cite$} + 'skip$ + if$ + + * " " * % tack on some space + +% I CAN'T STAND SORTING ON TITLE!!! TDS 1989 Dec 5 +% title field.or.null +% sort.format.title +% * % attach them together + cite$ + * % use cite$ instead!! + + % note: if there is no year, then the cite$ will override the sorting + % on the title. Oh well. Title sorting is sorta (ha ha) awful. + + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := + + % The following line helps debug the program. It shows what the sort.key$ is. + % "%" sort.key$ * write$ newline$ +} + +% Here is the place that the actual executions of the labeling and sorting +% functions are done. + + +EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} % initialize variables +ITERATE {bib.sort.order} % set up the sorting keys +SORT % by sort.label, year, title---giving final bibliography order +% Having sorted NOW we apply the extra letters at the end! +ITERATE {forward.pass} +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ % no \etalchar in apalike + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ % no labels in apalike +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/jas99.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/jas99.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ca4a4dc129 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/jas99.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1336 @@ +% Attempted hack to create BibTeX `jas' style for BibTeX version 0.99c +% Journal of Atmospheric Science, Journal of Applied Meteorology +% Monthly Weather Review +% by Mike Moran, Dept. of Atmospheric Science, Colorado State University +% based on `newapa' style file. Changes are documented. March 9, 1990 +% Submitted 20-JUL-1993 by Piotr J. Flatau <pflatau@macao.ucsd.edu> +% e-mail for Mike Moran: <mmoran@cid.aes.doe.ca> +% ======================================================================== +% +% BibTeX `newapa' style file for BibTeX version 0.99c, LaTeX version 2.09 +% Place it in a file called newapa.bst in the BibTeX search path. +%(Placing it in the same directory as the LaTeX document should also work.) +% Support for named citations is provided by named.sty + +% This version was made by modifying the master file made by +% Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU), and the 'named' BibTeX +% style of Peter F. Patel-Schneider. + +% Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. +% Modifications Copyright 1989, 1990, Stephen N. Spencer +% Copying of this file is authorized only if either +% (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or +% (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than +% btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. +% This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + +% There are undoubtably bugs in this style. If you make bug fixes, +% improvements, etc. please let me know. My e-mail address is: +% spencer@heinlein.cgrg.ohio.state.edu +% +% Citation format: (author-last-name, year) +% (author-last-name and author-last-name, year) +% (author-last-name {\em et al.}, year) +% (author-last-name) +% (author-last-name and author-last-name) +% (author-last-name {\em et al.}) +% (year) +% +% Reference list ordering: alphabetical by author or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one. +% +% This BibTeX style has support for abbreviated author lists and for +% year-only citations. This is done by having the citations +% actually look like +% +% \citeauthoryear{full-author-info}{abbrev-author-info}{year} +% +% The LaTeX style has to have the following (or similar) +% +% \let\@internalcite\cite +% \def\fullcite{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##1, ##3}\@internalcite} +% \def\fullciteA{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##1}\@internalcite} +% \def\shortcite{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##2, ##3}\@internalcite} +% \def\shortciteA{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##2}\@internalcite} +% \def\citeyear{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##3}\@internalcite} +% + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key +% month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + {} + { label extra.label sort.label } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t u } + +%% Added this function March 9, 1990. Used in FUNCTION format.vol.num.pages +FUNCTION {boldcize} +{ 's := + s "" = + { "" } + { "{\bf " s * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +%% Added this entire function based on JAS98.BST (March 10, 1990) +FUNCTION {output.nonnull1} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { write$ %% This is only difference + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +%% Added this function based on JAS98.BST (March 10, 1990) +FUNCTION {output.check1} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull1 %% Only difference + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.year.check} +{ year empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } + { write$ +%% " (" year * extra.label * ") " * + ", " year * extra.label * ": " * +%% March 9, 1990 + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + + "\bibitem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := % nameptr = 1; + s num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames = num.name$(s); + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := + + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := % nameptr += 1; + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := % namesleft =- 1; + } + while$ +} + +%% Added this entire function based on JAS98.BST (March 10, 1990) +FUNCTION {format.names.reverse1} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := % nameptr = 1 (name pointer variable); + s num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames = num.name$(s); + numnames 'namesleft := % namesleft = numnames (names left variable); + { namesleft #0 > } + +%% So long as "namesleft" is positive, execute following function + { +%% s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % Set name format + + nameptr #1 > +%% ** Co-authors section + { + s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := % Set name format + namesleft #1 > +%% ** Not last author + { ", " * t * } +%% ** Last author + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } +%% ** First author section + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % Set name format + t + } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := % nameptr += 1; + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := % namesleft =- 1; + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } +%% { author format.names } + { author format.names.reverse1 } +%% March 10, 1990 + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.key} +{ empty$ + { key field.or.null } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + + { title "t" change.case$ } + + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check +%% { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } +%% { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + { pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +%%{ volume field.or.null +{volume field.or.null boldcize %% March 9, 1990 + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } +%% { ":" * pages n.dashify * } + { ", " * pages n.dashify * } %% March 9, 1990 + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "In " booktitle emphasize * } +%% { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + { "In " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.editors * } +%% March 11, 1990 + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ "In" + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ "In" + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 10, 1990 + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.btitle "title" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + howpublished output + address output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.btitle "title" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output +%% format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + pages output %% March 20, 1990 + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output +%% format.chapter.pages output %% March 20, 1990 + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + pages output %% March 20, 1990 + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output +%% new.sentence %% March 17, 1990 + organization output + publisher output + address output + pages output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.btitle "title" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + format.edition output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + title howpublished new.block.checkb +%% format.title output + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + howpublished output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 +%% new.block %% March 17, 1990 + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.btitle "title" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.btitle "title" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address output + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note "note" output.check + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"January"} + +MACRO {feb} {"February"} + +MACRO {mar} {"March"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"October"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"December"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { fullptr numfull fullsleft } + +STRINGS { u1 u2 } + +%FUNCTION {my.full.label} +%{ +% "foo" 'u := +% u +%} + +FUNCTION {my.full.label} +{ +% Initialize 'u1','u2','s'. + "" 'u1 := + "" 'u2 := + 's := + +% Initialize 'fullptr','numfull','fullsleft'. + #1 'fullptr := + s num.names$ 'numfull := + numfull 'fullsleft := + +% enter the while loop which generates the first-citation information. +% while we have names left, +% format the next name +% if this is the next-to-last name, tack the ampersand on the end +% else if this isn't the last name, tack the comma on the end. +% concatenate the next name onto the first-citation string. +% update the counters. + + { fullsleft #0 > } + { s fullptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ 'u1 := + fullsleft #2 = + { u1 " \& " * 'u1 := } + { fullsleft #2 > + { u1 ", " * 'u1 := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + u2 u1 * 'u2 := + fullptr #1 + 'fullptr := + fullsleft #1 - 'fullsleft := + } + while$ + +% push 'u2' onto the stack -- our first-citation information. + u2 +} + +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := + s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + s num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { "et~al. " * } + { " and " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + duplicate$ + + author my.full.label % generate the first-citation information. + + "\protect\citeauthoryear{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}{" * + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ * + 'label := + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ * + sortify 'sort.label := +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + label sortify + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ % added for newapa + 'sort.label := % added for newapa + sort.label % added for newapa + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT % sort by label, sort.label, title --- for final label calculation + +STRINGS { last.label next.extra } + +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } + +FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.label label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + label 'last.label := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + label extra.label * "}" * 'label := + extra.label 'next.extra := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} + +ITERATE {forward.pass} + +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} +{ sort.label + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {bib.sort.order} + +SORT % by sort.label, year, title --- giving final bib. order. + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} + +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/jas99_m.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/jas99_m.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6b462051f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/jas99_m.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1365 @@ +% jas99_m.bst: +% BibTeX style based on jas99.bst (Mike Moran, 1990, see below), +% modified for better conformity to the American Meteorological +% Society (AMS) style. +% +% Before distributing this file, I sent email to the original +% author (Mike Moran) and the maintainer (Piotr J. Flatau) for +% permission, but apparantly both email addresses listed below +% were disabled and email messages I sent were bounced back. +% +% So, I make this modified file public without their permission, +% since I guess they would grant it, as is usually the case for +% this kind of files. If it's not OK to make this public, please +% contact me. +% +% Undoubtedly there are remaining inconformities to the AMS +% style, because I corrected only the features that I used. +% If you find bugs, please let me know, although I cannot +% promise that I would find time to fix it. +% +% Ryo Furue, Center for Climate System Research, U of Tokyo, +% <furufuru@ccsr.u-tokyo.ac.jp>, 23 June 2000. +% +% ======================================================================= +% Attempted hack to create BibTeX `jas' style for BibTeX version 0.99c +% Journal of Atmospheric Science, Journal of Applied Meteorology +% Monthly Weather Review +% by Mike Moran, Dept. of Atmospheric Science, Colorado State University +% based on `newapa' style file. Changes are documented. March 9, 1990 +% Submitted 20-JUL-1993 by Piotr J. Flatau <pflatau@macao.ucsd.edu> +% e-mail for Mike Moran: <mmoran@cid.aes.doe.ca> +% ======================================================================== +% +% BibTeX `newapa' style file for BibTeX version 0.99c, LaTeX version 2.09 +% Place it in a file called newapa.bst in the BibTeX search path. +%(Placing it in the same directory as the LaTeX document should also work.) +% Support for named citations is provided by named.sty + +% This version was made by modifying the master file made by +% Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU), and the 'named' BibTeX +% style of Peter F. Patel-Schneider. + +% Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. +% Modifications Copyright 1989, 1990, Stephen N. Spencer +% Copying of this file is authorized only if either +% (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or +% (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than +% btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. +% This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + +% There are undoubtably bugs in this style. If you make bug fixes, +% improvements, etc. please let me know. My e-mail address is: +% spencer@heinlein.cgrg.ohio.state.edu +% +% Citation format: (author-last-name, year) +% (author-last-name and author-last-name, year) +% (author-last-name {\em et al.}, year) +% (author-last-name) +% (author-last-name and author-last-name) +% (author-last-name {\em et al.}) +% (year) +% +% Reference list ordering: alphabetical by author or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one. +% +% This BibTeX style has support for abbreviated author lists and for +% year-only citations. This is done by having the citations +% actually look like +% +% \citeauthoryear{full-author-info}{abbrev-author-info}{year} +% +% The LaTeX style has to have the following (or similar) +% +% \let\@internalcite\cite +% \def\fullcite{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##1, ##3}\@internalcite} +% \def\fullciteA{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##1}\@internalcite} +% \def\shortcite{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##2, ##3}\@internalcite} +% \def\shortciteA{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##2}\@internalcite} +% \def\citeyear{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##3}\@internalcite} +% + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key +% month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + {} + { label extra.label sort.label } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t u } + +%% Added this function March 9, 1990. Used in FUNCTION format.vol.num.pages +FUNCTION {boldcize} +{ 's := + s "" = + { "" } + { "{\bf " s * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +%% Added this entire function based on JAS98.BST (March 10, 1990) +FUNCTION {output.nonnull1} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { write$ %% This is only difference + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +%% Added this function based on JAS98.BST (March 10, 1990) +FUNCTION {output.check1} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull1 %% Only difference + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.year.check} +{ year empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } + { write$ +%% " (" year * extra.label * ") " * + ", " year * extra.label * ": " * +%% March 9, 1990 + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + + "\bibitem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +%% name format for names within an entry +%% (for names *within* an entry, not for authors). %%Ryo%% +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := % nameptr = 1; + s num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames = num.name$(s); + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + +%%Ryo { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := + { s nameptr "{f. }{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := + + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := % nameptr += 1; + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := % namesleft =- 1; + } + while$ +} + +%% Added this entire function based on JAS98.BST (March 10, 1990) +FUNCTION {format.names.reverse1} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := % nameptr = 1 (name pointer variable); + s num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames = num.name$(s); + numnames 'namesleft := % namesleft = numnames (names left variable); + { namesleft #0 > } + +%% So long as "namesleft" is positive, execute following function + { +%% s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % Set name format + + nameptr #1 > +%% ** Co-authors section + { + s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := % Set name format + namesleft #1 > +%% ** Not last author + { ", " * t * } +%% ** Last author + { %% numnames #2 > %%Ryo + %% { "," * } + %% 'skip$ + %%if$ + "," * + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } +%% ** First author section + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % Set name format + t + } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := % nameptr += 1; + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := % namesleft =- 1; + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } +%% { author format.names } + { author format.names.reverse1 } +%% March 10, 1990 + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.key} +{ empty$ + { key field.or.null } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", Eds." * } %%Ryo%% + { ", Ed." * } %%Ryo%% + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + + { title "t" change.case$ } + + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check +%% { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } +%% { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + { pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +%%{ volume field.or.null +{volume field.or.null boldcize %% March 9, 1990 + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } +%% { ":" * pages n.dashify * } + { ", " * pages n.dashify * } %% March 9, 1990 + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "" booktitle emphasize * } %%Ryo%% +%% { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + { "" booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.editors * } %%Ryo%% +%% March 11, 1990 + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ "In" + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ "In" + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 10, 1990 + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ +%%Ryo%% new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.btitle "title" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output +%%Ryo pages output %% March 11, 1990 + pages " pp" * output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + howpublished output + address output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.btitle "title" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output +%% format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + pages output %% March 20, 1990 + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output +%% format.chapter.pages output %% March 20, 1990 + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + pages output %% March 20, 1990 + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output +%% new.sentence %% March 17, 1990 + organization output + publisher output + address output + pages output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.btitle "title" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + format.edition output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + title howpublished new.block.checkb +%% format.title output + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + howpublished output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 +%% new.block %% March 17, 1990 + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.btitle "title" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.btitle "title" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address output + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + pages output %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % added + output.year.check % added + new.block +%% format.title "title" output.check + format.title "title" output.check1 %% March 11, 1990 + new.block + note "note" output.check + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"January"} + +MACRO {feb} {"February"} + +MACRO {mar} {"March"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"October"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"December"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { fullptr numfull fullsleft } + +STRINGS { u1 u2 } + +%FUNCTION {my.full.label} +%{ +% "foo" 'u := +% u +%} + +FUNCTION {my.full.label} +{ +% Initialize 'u1','u2','s'. + "" 'u1 := + "" 'u2 := + 's := + +% Initialize 'fullptr','numfull','fullsleft'. + #1 'fullptr := + s num.names$ 'numfull := + numfull 'fullsleft := + +% enter the while loop which generates the first-citation information. +% while we have names left, +% format the next name +% if this is the next-to-last name, tack the ampersand on the end +% else if this isn't the last name, tack the comma on the end. +% concatenate the next name onto the first-citation string. +% update the counters. + + { fullsleft #0 > } + { s fullptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ 'u1 := + fullsleft #2 = + { u1 " \& " * 'u1 := } + { fullsleft #2 > + { u1 ", " * 'u1 := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + u2 u1 * 'u2 := + fullptr #1 + 'fullptr := + fullsleft #1 - 'fullsleft := + } + while$ + +% push 'u2' onto the stack -- our first-citation information. + u2 +} + +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := + s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + s num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { "et~al. " * } + { " and " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + duplicate$ + + author my.full.label % generate the first-citation information. + + "\protect\citeauthoryear{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}{" * + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ * + 'label := + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ * + sortify 'sort.label := +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + label sortify + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ % added for newapa + 'sort.label := % added for newapa + sort.label % added for newapa + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT % sort by label, sort.label, title --- for final label calculation + +STRINGS { last.label next.extra } + +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } + +FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.label label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + label 'last.label := + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + label extra.label * "}" * 'label := + extra.label 'next.extra := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} + +ITERATE {forward.pass} + +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} +{ sort.label + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {bib.sort.order} + +SORT % by sort.label, year, title --- giving final bib. order. + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} + +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/numalg.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/numalg.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..697cd41974 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/misc/numalg.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1370 @@ +%%% ==================================================================== +%%% @BibTeX-style-file{ +%%% filename = "numalg.bst", +%%% version = "1.0", +%%% date = "2003/06/30", +%%% time = "00:00:00 CET", +%%% author = "Richard J Mathar", +%%% address = "Max Planck Institute of Astronomy, +%%% Konigstuhl 17, +%%% 69117 Heidelberg +%%% Germany", +%%% telephone = "(+49)6221-528-302", +%%% FAX = "(+49)6221-528-246", +%%% email = "mathar@mpia.de", +%%% copyright = " This generated file can be redistributed and/or +%%% modified under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public +%%% License Distributed from CTAN archives in directory +%%% macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either version 1 of the +%%% License, or any later version.", +%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII", +%%% keywords = "bibtex, bibliography, Kluwer, Numerical Algorithms", +%%% abstract = "BibTeX bibliography style `numalg' for BibTeX +%%% versions 0.99a or later and LaTeX version 2e. +%%% Produces items in a form close to the style +%%% of Kluwer's Numerical Algorithms. For the generic +%%% Kluwer styles see http://www.wkap.nl/authors/jrnlstylefiles/.", +%%% docstring = "Produced by latex makebst.tex. +%%% To be replaced by any official Kluwer file once +%%% available." +%%% } +%%% ==================================================================== + +%% +%% This is file `numalg.bst', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% merlin.mbs (with options: `,nm-init,ed-au,yr-par,xmth,jttl-rm,vnum-x,volp-blk,jdt-vs,pgsep-s,pp-last,jnm-x,pub-date,pre-pub,url,url-blk,edby,edbyx,blk-com,in-col,pp,ed,abr,xedn,jabr,and-xcom,nfss') +%% ---------------------------------------- +%% *** Kluwer Numerical Algorithms *** +%% +%% Copyright 1994-1999 Patrick W Daly + % =============================================================== + % IMPORTANT NOTICE: + % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or + % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above. + % + % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms + % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN + % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either + % version 1 of the License, or any later version. + % =============================================================== + % Name and version information of the main mbs file: + % \ProvidesFile{merlin.mbs}[1999/05/28 3.89 (PWD)] + % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later + %------------------------------------------------------------------- + % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH + % This is a numerical citation style, and as such is standard LaTeX. + % It requires no extra package to interface to the main text. + % The form of the \bibitem entries is + % \bibitem{key}... + % Usage of \cite is as follows: + % \cite{key} ==>> [#] + % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [#, chap. 2] + % where # is a number determined by the ordering in the reference list. + % The order in the reference list is alphabetical by authors. + %--------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + url + volume + year + } + {} + { label } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t } + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {add.blank} +{ " " * before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {date.block} +{ + skip$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + + +FUNCTION {capitalize} +{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ } + +FUNCTION {space.word} +{ " " swap$ * " " * } + + % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words. + % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word. + % The language selected here is ENGLISH +FUNCTION {bbl.and} +{ "and"} + +FUNCTION {bbl.etal} +{ "et~al." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.editors} +{ "eds." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.editor} +{ "ed." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.edby} +{ "edited by" } + +FUNCTION {bbl.edition} +{ "edn." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.volume} +{ "vol." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.of} +{ "of" } + +FUNCTION {bbl.number} +{ "no." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.nr} +{ "no." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.in} +{ "in" } + +FUNCTION {bbl.pages} +{ "pp." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.page} +{ "p." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.chapter} +{ "chap." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.techrep} +{ "Tech. Rep." } + +FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis} +{ "Master's thesis" } + +FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis} +{ "Ph.D. thesis" } + +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} + +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} + +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} + +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"Jun."} + +MACRO {jul} {"Jul."} + +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} + +MACRO {sep} {"Sep."} + +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} + +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} + +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} + +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} + +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} + + +FUNCTION {format.url} +{ url empty$ + { "" } + { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + "" 't := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr + "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ + 't := + nameptr #1 > + { + namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { + s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = + { 't := } + { pop$ } + if$ + t "others" = + { + " " * bbl.etal * + } + { bbl.and + space.word * t * + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.names.ed} +{ format.names } + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + ", " * + editor num.names$ #1 > + 'bbl.editors + 'bbl.editor + if$ + * + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names.ed + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.note} +{ + note empty$ + { "" } + { note #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "{" = + 'skip$ + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "l" } + { "u" } + if$ + change.case$ + } + if$ + note #2 global.max$ substring$ * + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {if.digit} +{ duplicate$ "0" = + swap$ duplicate$ "1" = + swap$ duplicate$ "2" = + swap$ duplicate$ "3" = + swap$ duplicate$ "4" = + swap$ duplicate$ "5" = + swap$ duplicate$ "6" = + swap$ duplicate$ "7" = + swap$ duplicate$ "8" = + swap$ "9" = or or or or or or or or or +} +FUNCTION {n.separate} +{ 't := + "" + #0 'numnames := + { t empty$ not } + { t #-1 #1 substring$ if.digit + { numnames #1 + 'numnames := } + { #0 'numnames := } + if$ + t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ * + t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + numnames #5 = + { duplicate$ #1 #2 substring$ swap$ + #3 global.max$ substring$ + "\," swap$ * * + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ + n.separate + 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {word.in} +{ bbl.in + ":" * + " " * } + +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { "" } + 'year + if$ + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { + before.all 'output.state := + " (" swap$ * ")" * + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION{format.year} +{ year duplicate$ empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ pop$ "" } + { " (" swap$ * ")" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { bbl.volume volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { bbl.of space.word * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { bbl.number } + { bbl.number capitalize } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { bbl.in space.word * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " " * bbl.edition * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " " * bbl.edition * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { bbl.pages pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { bbl.page pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.journal.pages} +{ pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { + " " * + pages n.dashify * + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null + format.year * +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + { "" } + { type empty$ + { bbl.chapter } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { word.in booktitle emphasize * } + { word.in booktitle emphasize * + ", " * + editor num.names$ #1 > + { bbl.editors } + { bbl.editor } + if$ + * " " * + format.in.editors * + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + key empty$ not and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { bbl.techrep } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ + key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { word.in journal emphasize * } + if$ + } + { word.in key * " " *} + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ + " " * bbl.etal * + } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { + " " * bbl.etal * + } + { bbl.and space.word * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + word.in + } + { bbl.volume volume tie.or.space.connect + bbl.of space.word * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { series emphasize * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { word.in booktitle emphasize * } + if$ + } + { word.in key * " " *} + if$ + } + { word.in format.crossref.editor * " " *} + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub} +{ 't := + "" + year empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + address empty$ t empty$ and + year empty$ and + 'skip$ + { + add.blank "(" * + t empty$ + { address empty$ + 'skip$ + { address * } + if$ + } + { t * + address empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * address * } + if$ + } + if$ + year empty$ + 'skip$ + { t empty$ address empty$ and + 'skip$ + { ", " * } + if$ + year * + } + if$ + ")" * + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.publisher.address} +{ publisher empty$ + { "empty publisher in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { publisher } + if$ + format.org.or.pub +} + +FUNCTION {format.organization.address} +{ organization empty$ + { "" } + { organization } + if$ + format.org.or.pub +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { journal + "journal" output.check + add.blank + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + format.journal.pages + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.publisher.address output + } + { + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { + format.publisher.address output + format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + format.number.series output + } + { + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.pages "pages" output.check + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.publisher.address output + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + format.edition output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + format.pages "pages" output.check + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + publisher empty$ + { format.organization.address output } + { organization output + format.publisher.address output + } + if$ + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + bbl.mthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + format.title output + howpublished output + format.date output + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + format.btitle "title" output.check + bbl.phdthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + editor empty$ + { publisher empty$ + 'skip$ + { + format.publisher.address output + } + if$ + } + { publisher empty$ + { + format.organization.address output } + { + organization output + format.publisher.address output + } + if$ + } + if$ + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + format.url output + format.note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + format.title "title" output.check + format.date output + format.url output + format.note "note" output.check + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +READ + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr + "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" + format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { + " " * + namesleft #1 = t "others" = and + { "zzzzz" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} +{ author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {presort} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.organization.sort + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.organization.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { longest.label } + +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } + +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} + +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} + +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * + write$ newline$ + "\expandafter\ifx\csname url\endcsname\relax" + write$ newline$ + " \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}\fi" + write$ newline$ + "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlprefix\endcsname\relax\def\urlprefix{URL }\fi" + write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} +%% End of customized bst file +%% +%% End of file `numalg.bst'. diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/nature.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/nature.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4d23240bdf --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/nature.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1012 @@ +% version = 1.05 of nature.bst 1992 June 29 + +% 1.01 1991 July 3 last name first +% bold face volume numbers +% volume followed by comma, not colon +% parenthesis around year +% no comma after page numbers (not done yet!) +% 1.02 1991 Aug 7 Titles removed in FUNCTION {format.title}. +% (Should put \nocite{TitlesOn} +% mechanism in from jmb.bst next) +% 1.03 1991 Aug 29 in inproceedings, book title preceeds the editors!! +% 1.04 1991 Aug 30 year at end of inproceedings +% no 'pages' in inproceedings +% when no comma, don't put space instead +% 1.04 1992 Jun 29 Fix format.vol.num.pages to use field.or.null to +% correctly handle case of missing volume. +% [Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@plot79.math.utah.edu>] + +% from: +% BibTeX standard bibliography style `unsrt' + % version 0.99a for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + } + {} + { label } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block + docomma } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := + + #1 'docomma := % if it is 0 then don't do commas, otherwise do them. +} + +STRINGS { s t } + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { % doing a comma is controlled specifically using docomma + docomma #0 = + { "" * write$ } % TDS nothing if no comma + { ", " * write$ } + if$ + } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } +% { s nameptr "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := % TDS + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { "" } % the zapped title +% { title "t" change.case$ } % TDS NO TITLES + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { month empty$ + { "" } + { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ + month + } + if$ + } + { month empty$ +% 'year % TDS +% { month " " * year * } % TDS + { " (" year * ")" * } + { " " month * " " * " (" year * ")" * * } +%The preceding line was modified by Alan Rogers on 6/26/92. It used to +%look like this: { month " " * " (" year * ")" * * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check +% { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } +% { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } +% no word in nature! + { "" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ "{ \bf " volume field.or.null * "}" * % make volume bold face + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } +% { ":" * pages n.dashify * } % TDS + { ", " * pages n.dashify * } % comma, not colon TDS + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "In " booktitle emphasize * } +% { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + { % book title preceeds the editors!! TDS + "In " + booktitle + ", " + * + emphasize + * + format.editors + * + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " journal * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { + journal emphasize "journal" output.check + #0 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS OFF + format.vol.num.pages output % these now do their own comma!! + format.date "year" output.check + #1 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS ON + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + #0 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS OFF + format.date "year" output.check + #1 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS ON + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + #0 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS OFF + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + #1 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS ON + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { +% new.sentence + #0 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS OFF + " (" output.nonnull + organization output + publisher output + #1 'docomma := % TURN COMMAS ON + address output.nonnull +% year is at the end TDS +% format.date "year" output.check +%zzz + year ")" * output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"January"} + +MACRO {feb} {"February"} + +MACRO {mar} {"March"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"October"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"December"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +STRINGS { longest.label } + +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } + +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} + +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} + +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/nature.sty b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/nature.sty new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0283f33d7d --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/nature.sty @@ -0,0 +1,241 @@ +% article.sty 16-Mar-88 + +\typeout{Document Style `article' <16 Mar 88>.} + + +\def\@ptsize{0} \@namedef{ds@11pt}{\def\@ptsize{1}} +\@namedef{ds@12pt}{\def\@ptsize{2}} +\def\ds@twoside{\@twosidetrue \@mparswitchtrue} \def\ds@draft{\overfullrule +5pt} +\@options +\input art1\@ptsize.sty\relax + + +\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.} +\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} +\def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)} +\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} +\def\p@enumii{\theenumi} +\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.} +\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} +\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} +\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.} +\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} +\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} + +\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$} +\def\labelitemii{\bf --} +\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$} +\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$} + +\def\verse{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]} +\let\endverse\endlist +\def\quotation{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em + \itemindent\listparindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item[]} +\let\endquotation=\endlist +\def\quote{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]} +\let\endquote=\endlist + +\def\descriptionlabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1} +\def\description{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin + \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} +\let\enddescription\endlist + + +\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} + + +\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} +\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} + +\arraycolsep 5pt \tabcolsep 6pt \arrayrulewidth .4pt \doublerulesep 2pt +\tabbingsep \labelsep + +\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins +\fboxsep = 3pt \fboxrule = .4pt + +\newcounter{part} +\newcounter {section} +\newcounter {subsection}[section] +\newcounter {subsubsection}[subsection] +\newcounter {paragraph}[subsubsection] +\newcounter {subparagraph}[paragraph] + +\def\thepart{\Roman{part}} \def\thesection {\arabic{section}} +\def\thesubsection {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}} +\def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection .\arabic{subsubsection}} +\def\theparagraph {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} +\def\thesubparagraph {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}} + +\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} +\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em} +\def\@dotsep{4.5} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} + +\def\tableofcontents{\section*{Contents\@mkboth{CONTENTS}{CONTENTS}} + \@starttoc{toc}} +\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty} + \addvspace{2.25em plus 1pt} \begingroup + \@tempdima 3em \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth \parfillskip +-\@pnumwidth + {\large \bf \leavevmode #1\hfil \hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}}\par + \nobreak \endgroup} +\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty} \addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt} +\@tempdima 1.5em \begingroup + \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth + \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth + \bf \leavevmode \advance\leftskip\@tempdima \hskip -\leftskip #1\nobreak\hfil +\nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par + \endgroup} + +\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.5em}{2.3em}} +\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{3.8em}{3.2em}} +\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{7.0em}{4.1em}} +\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{10em}{5em}} +\def\listoffigures{\section*{List of Figures\@mkboth + {LIST OF FIGURES}{LIST OF FIGURES}}\@starttoc{lof}} +\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}} +\def\listoftables{\section*{List of Tables\@mkboth + {LIST OF TABLES}{LIST OF TABLES}}\@starttoc{lot}} +\let\l@table\l@figure + + +% \def\thebibliography#1{\section*{MyReferences\@mkboth +\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\@mkboth + {REFERENCES}{REFERENCES}}\list +% {[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}\leftmargin\labelwidth + {\arabic{enumi}.}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}\leftmargin\labelwidth + \advance\leftmargin\labelsep + \usecounter{enumi}} + \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em} + \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000 + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax} +\let\endthebibliography=\endlist + + +\newif\if@restonecol +\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi +\columnseprule \z@ +\columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\section*{Index}] + \@mkboth{INDEX}{INDEX}\thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ plus .3pt\relax\let\item\@idxitem} +\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40pt} +\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40pt \hspace*{20pt}} +\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40pt \hspace*{30pt}} +\def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} +\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10pt plus 5pt minus 3pt\relax} + +\def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@ + \hrule width .4\columnwidth + \kern 2.6\p@} + +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\noindent + \hbox to 1.8em{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1} + + +\setcounter{topnumber}{2} +\def\topfraction{.7} +\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1} +\def\bottomfraction{.3} +\setcounter{totalnumber}{3} +\def\textfraction{.2} +\def\floatpagefraction{.5} +\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2} +\def\dbltopfraction{.7} +\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.5} + +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{ + \vskip 10pt + \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1: #2} + \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize #1: #2\par \else \hbox +to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil} + \fi} + + +\newcounter{figure} +\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} +\def\fps@figure{tbp} +\def\ftype@figure{1} +\def\ext@figure{lof} +\def\fnum@figure{Figure \thefigure} +\def\figure{\@float{figure}} +\let\endfigure\end@float +\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}} +\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} +\newcounter{table} +\def\thetable{\@arabic\c@table} +\def\fps@table{tbp} +\def\ftype@table{2} +\def\ext@table{lot} +\def\fnum@table{Table \thetable} +\def\table{\@float{table}} +\let\endtable\end@float +\@namedef{table*}{\@dblfloat{table}} +\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} + + +\def\maketitle{\par + \begingroup + \def\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}} + \def\@makefnmark{\hbox + to 0pt{$^{\@thefnmark}$\hss}} + \if@twocolumn + \twocolumn[\@maketitle] + \else \newpage + \global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle \fi\thispagestyle{plain}\@thanks + \endgroup + \setcounter{footnote}{0} + \let\maketitle\relax + \let\@maketitle\relax + \gdef\@thanks{}\gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}\let\thanks\relax} +\def\@maketitle{\newpage + \null + \vskip 2em \begin{center} + {\LARGE \@title \par} \vskip 1.5em {\large \lineskip .5em +\begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author + \end{tabular}\par} + \vskip 1em {\large \@date} \end{center} + \par + \vskip 1.5em} +\def\abstract{\if@twocolumn +\section*{Abstract} +\else \small +\begin{center} +{\bf Abstract\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{0pt}} +\end{center} +\quotation +\fi} +\def\endabstract{\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi} + +\mark{{}{}} + +\if@twoside \def\ps@headings{\let\@mkboth\markboth +\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}\def\@evenhead{\rm \thepage\hfil \sl +\leftmark}\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\sl \rightmark \hfil +\rm\thepage}\def\sectionmark##1{\markboth {\uppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth +>\z@ + \thesection\hskip 1em\relax \fi ##1}}{}}\def\subsectionmark##1{\markright +{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne + \thesubsection\hskip 1em\relax \fi ##1}}} +\else \def\ps@headings{\let\@mkboth\markboth +\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}\def\@oddhead{\hbox {}\sl \rightmark \hfil +\rm\thepage}\def\sectionmark##1{\markright {\uppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth +>\z@ + \thesection\hskip 1em\relax \fi ##1}}}} +\fi +\def\ps@myheadings{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo +\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\sl\rightmark \hfil +\rm\thepage}\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenhead{\rm \thepage\hfil\sl\leftmark\hbox +{}}\def\@evenfoot{}\def\sectionmark##1{}\def\subsectionmark##1{}} + + +\def\today{\ifcase\month\or + January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or + July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi + \space\number\day, \number\year} + +\ps@plain \pagenumbering{arabic} \onecolumn \if@twoside\else\raggedbottom\fi diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phaip.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phaip.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4c138d904b --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phaip.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1885 @@ +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). +% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. +% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. +% These are the original macros + % For American Institute of Physics Journals +% This is the start of btxbst.doc +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +%# define PLAIN 1 +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). + month +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. + { label } +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders +STRINGS { s t } +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { "," * write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} +% This function finishes all entries. +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ skip$ +} +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {paren} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "(" swap$ * ")" * } + if$ +} +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } +INTEGERS { etal } +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #5 > + s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #1 > and + or 'etal := + etal + { #1 #1 + 'namesleft := } + { numnames 'namesleft := } + if$ + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { nameptr #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + etal or + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.edited} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "edited by " editor format.names * } + if$ +} +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {first.page} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ +} +% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if +% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string +% if they're both empty. +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { "" } + 'year + if$ +} +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END +INTEGERS { multiresult } +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.pages.a} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { "page" pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null embolden + " " swap$ * * + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages.a } + { ", " * pages first.page * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "in " booktitle emphasize * } + { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and +% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In " journal * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either +% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on +% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal field.or.null + format.vol.num.pages + format.date empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.date paren } + { " " * format.date paren * } + if$ + } + if$ + output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} +MACRO {may} {"May"} +MACRO {jun} {"June"} +MACRO {jul} {"July"} +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} +MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} +%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 +%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> +%% Change file names in leading comment +% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation +% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. +% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 +% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the +% corresponding changes to +% phyjabb.bib +% phyjabb.btx +MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} +MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} +MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} +MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} +MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} +MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} +MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} +MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} +MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} +MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} +MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} +MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} +MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} +MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} +MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} +MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} +MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} +MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} +MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} +MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} +MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} +MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} +MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} +MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} +MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} +MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} +MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} +MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} +MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} +MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} +MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} +MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} +MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} +MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} +MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} +MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} +MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} +MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} +MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} +MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} +MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} +MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} +MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} +MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} +MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} +MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. +READ +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END +% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. +% We use either the sorted order or original order. +% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +STRINGS { longest.label } +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {begin.bib} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} +% Now we produce the output for all the entries +ITERATE {call.type$} +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phapalik.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phapalik.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..84a0dda965 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phapalik.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1943 @@ +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). +% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. +% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. +% These are the original macros + % For American Psychological Association + % (same as ALPHA but with 0 set and 0 unset) +% This is the start of btxbst.doc +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +% BibTeX `apalike' bibliography style (24-Jan-88 version) +% Adapted from the `alpha' style, version 0.99a; for BibTeX version 0.99a. +% Copyright (C) 1988, all rights reserved. +% Copying of this file is allowed, provided that if you make any changes at all +% you name it something other than `apalike.bst'. +% This restriction helps ensure that all copies are identical. +% Differences between this style and `alpha' are generally heralded by a `%'. +% The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for alpha.bst. +% +% This style should be used with the `apalike' LaTeX style (apalike.sty). +% \cite's come out like "(Jones, 1986)" in the text but there are no labels +% in the bibliography, and something like "(1986)" comes out immediately +% after the author. Author (and editor) names appear as last name, comma, +% initials. A `year' field is required for every entry, and so is either +% an author (or in some cases, an editor) field or a key field. +% +% Editorial note: +% Many journals require a style like `apalike', but I strongly, strongly, +% strongly recommend that you not use it if you have a choice---use something +% like `plain' instead. Mary-Claire van Leunen (A Handbook for Scholars, +% Knopf, 1979) argues convincingly that a style like `plain' encourages better +% writing than one like `apalike'. Furthermore the strongest arguments for +% using an author-date style like `apalike'---that it's "the most practical" +% (The Chicago Manual of Style, University of Chicago Press, thirteenth +% edition, 1982, pages 400--401)---fall flat on their face with the new +% computer-typesetting technology. For instance page 401 anachronistically +% states "The chief disadvantage of [a style like `plain'] is that additions +% or deletions cannot be made after the manuscript is typed without changing +% numbers in both text references and list." LaTeX sidesteps the disadvantage. +% +% History: +% 15-sep-86 (SK,OP) Original version, by Susan King and Oren Patashnik. +% 10-nov-86 (OP) Truncated the sort.key$ string to the correct length +% in bib.sort.order to eliminate error message. +% 24-jan-88 (OP) Updated for BibTeX version 0.99a, from alpha.bst 0.99a; +% apalike now sorts by author, then year, then title; +% THIS `apalike' VERSION DOES NOT WORK WITH BIBTEX 0.98i. +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% 1: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% 1: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% 1: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% 1: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +%# define PLAIN 1 +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). +% month not used in apalike +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. + { label extra.label sort.label } +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders +STRINGS { s t } +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +% apalike needs this function because +% the year has special punctuation; +% apalike ignores the month +FUNCTION {output.year.check} +{ year empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } + { write$ + " (" year * extra.label * ")" * + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} +% This function finishes all entries. +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.key} % this function is just for apalike +{ empty$ + { key field.or.null } + { "" } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END +INTEGERS { multiresult } +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ":" * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "In " booktitle emphasize * } + { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ "In" % this is for apalike + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * % this is for apalike +} +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ "In" % this is for apalike + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + output.year.check % special for apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + howpublished output + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + output.year.check % special for apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address output % for apalike + new.sentence % there's no year + organization output % here so things + publisher output % are simpler + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title output + new.block + howpublished output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.editors output + editor format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address output % for apalike + new.sentence % we always output + organization output % a nonempty organization + publisher output % here + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + fin.entry +} +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated +MACRO {jan} {"January"} +MACRO {feb} {"February"} +MACRO {mar} {"March"} +MACRO {apr} {"April"} +MACRO {may} {"May"} +MACRO {jun} {"June"} +MACRO {jul} {"July"} +MACRO {aug} {"August"} +MACRO {sep} {"September"} +MACRO {oct} {"October"} +MACRO {nov} {"November"} +MACRO {dec} {"December"} +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. +READ +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} +INTEGERS { len } +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END +% There are three apalike cases: one person (Jones), +% two (Jones and de~Bruijn), and more (Jones et~al.). +% This function is much like format.crossref.editors. +% +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := + s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + s num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key % apalike uses the whole key + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key % apalike uses the whole key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {editor.key.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key % apalike uses the whole key, no organization + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.label % apalike ignores organization + 'author.key.label % for labeling and sorting + if$ + } + if$ + ", " % these three lines are + * % for apalike, which + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ % uses all four digits + * + 'label := +} +% It doesn't seem like a particularly good idea to use an order-of-citation +% reference list when using alphabetic labels, but we need to have a +% special pass to calculate labels when this happens. +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ % apalike uses initials + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := % <= here + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +% The sort.format.title function returns the argument, +% but first any leading "A "'s, "An "'s, or "The "'s are removed. +% The chop.word function uses s, so we need another string variable, t +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} +% The auxiliary functions here, for the presort function, are analogous to +% the ones for calc.label; the same comments apply, except that the +% organization field takes precedence here over the key field. For sorting +% purposes, we still remove a leading "The " from the organization field. +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {editor.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} +% apalike uses two sorting passes; the first one sets the +% labels so that the `a's, `b's, etc. can be computed; +% the second pass puts the references in "correct" order. +% The presort function is for the first pass. It computes +% label, sort.label, and title, and then concatenates. +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + label sortify + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ % for + 'sort.label := % apalike + sort.label % style + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} +ITERATE {presort} +% And now we can sort +SORT % by label, sort.label, title---for final label calculation +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END +STRINGS { last.label next.extra } % apalike labels are only for the text; +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } % there are none in the bibliography +FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} % and hence there is no `longest.label' +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.label label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + label 'last.label := + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + label extra.label * 'label := + extra.label 'next.extra := +} +EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} +ITERATE {forward.pass} +REVERSE {reverse.pass} +% Now that the label is right we sort for real, +% on sort.label then year then title. This is +% for the second sorting pass. +FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} +{ sort.label + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} +ITERATE {bib.sort.order} +SORT % by sort.label, year, title---giving final bibliography order +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ % no \etalchar in apalike + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ % no labels in apalike +} +EXECUTE {begin.bib} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} +% Now we produce the output for all the entries +ITERATE {call.type$} +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phcpc.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phcpc.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e313fe16af --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phcpc.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1885 @@ +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). +% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. +% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. +% These are the original macros + % For Computer Physics Communications +% same as AIP except for 0, 0 +% This is the start of btxbst.doc +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +%# define PLAIN 1 +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). + month +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. + { label } +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders +STRINGS { s t } +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { "," * write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} +% This function finishes all entries. +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ skip$ +} +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {paren} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "(" swap$ * ")" * } + if$ +} +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } +INTEGERS { etal } +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #5 > + s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #1 > and + or 'etal := + etal + { #1 #1 + 'namesleft := } + { numnames 'namesleft := } + if$ + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { nameptr #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + etal or + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.edited} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "edited by " editor format.names * } + if$ +} +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {first.page} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ +} +% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if +% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string +% if they're both empty. +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { "" } + 'year + if$ +} +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END +INTEGERS { multiresult } +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.pages.a} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { "page" pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null embolden + " " swap$ * * + format.date empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.date paren } + { " " * format.date paren * } + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages.a } + { " " * pages first.page *} + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "in " booktitle emphasize * } + { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and +% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In " journal * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either +% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on +% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal field.or.null + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} +MACRO {may} {"May"} +MACRO {jun} {"June"} +MACRO {jul} {"July"} +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} +MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} +%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 +%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> +%% Change file names in leading comment +% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation +% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. +% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 +% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the +% corresponding changes to +% phyjabb.bib +% phyjabb.btx +MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} +MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} +MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} +MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} +MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} +MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} +MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} +MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} +MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} +MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} +MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} +MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} +MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} +MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} +MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} +MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} +MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} +MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} +MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} +MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} +MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} +MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} +MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} +MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} +MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} +MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} +MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} +MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} +MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} +MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} +MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} +MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} +MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} +MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} +MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} +MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} +MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} +MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} +MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} +MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} +MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} +MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} +MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} +MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} +MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} +MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. +READ +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END +% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. +% We use either the sorted order or original order. +% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +STRINGS { longest.label } +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {begin.bib} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} +% Now we produce the output for all the entries +ITERATE {call.type$} +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phiaea.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phiaea.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..90dbdedac1 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phiaea.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1889 @@ +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). +% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. +% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. +% These are the original macros + % For 1 Conferences +% same as NF except for 0 and 0 set to 1 +% This is the start of btxbst.doc +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +%# define PLAIN 1 +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). + month +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. + { label } +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders +STRINGS { s t } +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { "," * write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} +% This function finishes all entries. +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ skip$ +} +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {paren} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "(" swap$ * ")" * } + if$ +} +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } +INTEGERS { etal } +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #1 > + s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #1 > and + or 'etal := + etal + { #1 #1 + 'namesleft := } + { numnames 'namesleft := } + if$ + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first + t "others" = + 'skip$ + { t "u" change.case$ 't := } + if$ + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { nameptr #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + etal or + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.edited} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "edited by " editor format.names * } + if$ +} +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {first.page} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ +} +% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if +% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string +% if they're both empty. +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { "" } + 'year + if$ +} +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END +INTEGERS { multiresult } +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.pages.a} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { "page" pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null embolden + " " swap$ * * + format.date empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.date paren } + { " " * format.date paren * } + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages.a } + { " " * pages first.page *} + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "in " booktitle emphasize * } + { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and +% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In " journal * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either +% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on +% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal field.or.null + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} +MACRO {may} {"May"} +MACRO {jun} {"June"} +MACRO {jul} {"July"} +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} +MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} +%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 +%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> +%% Change file names in leading comment +% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation +% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. +% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 +% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the +% corresponding changes to +% phyjabb.bib +% phyjabb.btx +MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} +MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} +MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} +MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} +MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} +MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} +MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} +MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} +MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} +MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} +MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} +MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} +MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} +MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} +MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} +MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} +MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} +MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} +MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} +MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} +MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} +MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} +MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} +MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} +MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} +MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} +MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} +MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} +MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} +MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} +MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} +MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} +MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} +MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} +MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} +MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} +MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} +MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} +MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} +MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} +MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} +MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} +MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} +MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} +MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} +MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. +READ +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END +% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. +% We use either the sorted order or original order. +% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +STRINGS { longest.label } +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {begin.bib} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} +% Now we produce the output for all the entries +ITERATE {call.type$} +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phnf.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phnf.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7c833bb825 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phnf.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1890 @@ +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). +% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. +% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. +% These are the original macros + % For Nuclear Fusion + % see Nuclear Fusion Vol. 28, No. 2 (1988), + % "Announcement [of] Guidelines for Bibliographical Citations" +% same as AIP except for 0, 0, 0 and +% 0 and 0 set to use only three names if there are +% 6 or more. Also, no 0, and use 0 and 0. +% There are still some nits to be picked (years in parentheses for +% other than journals, volumes having Vol. before them and pages not +% having p.) +% This is the start of btxbst.doc +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +%# define PLAIN 1 +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). + month +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. + { label } +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders +STRINGS { s t } +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { "," * write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} +% This function finishes all entries. +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ skip$ +} +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {paren} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "(" swap$ * ")" * } + if$ +} +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } +INTEGERS { etal } +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #5 > + s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #3 > and + or 'etal := + etal + { #3 #1 + 'namesleft := } + { numnames 'namesleft := } + if$ + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first + t "others" = + 'skip$ + { t "u" change.case$ 't := } + if$ + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { nameptr #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + etal or + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {first.page} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ +} +% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if +% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string +% if they're both empty. +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { "" } + 'year + if$ +} +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END +INTEGERS { multiresult } +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.pages.a} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { "p." pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null embolden + " " swap$ * * + format.date empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.date paren } + { " " * format.date paren * } + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages.a } + { " " * pages first.page *} + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "in " booktitle emphasize * } + { "in " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and +% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In " journal * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either +% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on +% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal field.or.null + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} +MACRO {may} {"May"} +MACRO {jun} {"June"} +MACRO {jul} {"July"} +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} +MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} +%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 +%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> +%% Change file names in leading comment +% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation +% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. +% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 +% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the +% corresponding changes to +% phyjabb.bib +% phyjabb.btx +MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} +MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} +MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} +MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} +MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} +MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} +MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} +MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} +MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} +MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} +MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} +MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} +MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} +MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} +MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} +MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} +MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} +MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} +MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} +MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} +MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} +MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} +MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} +MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} +MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} +MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} +MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} +MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} +MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} +MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} +MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} +MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} +MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} +MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} +MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} +MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} +MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} +MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} +MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} +MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} +MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} +MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} +MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} +MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} +MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} +MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. +READ +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END +% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. +% We use either the sorted order or original order. +% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +STRINGS { longest.label } +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {begin.bib} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} +% Now we produce the output for all the entries +ITERATE {call.type$} +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phnflet.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phnflet.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4c7fc07790 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phnflet.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1883 @@ +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). +% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. +% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. +% These are the original macros + % For Nuclear Fusion Letters +% same as NF except for 0 and 0 set to 5 +% This is the start of btxbst.doc +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +%# define PLAIN 1 +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). + month +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. + { label } +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders +STRINGS { s t } +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { "," * write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} +% This function finishes all entries. +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ skip$ +} +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {paren} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "(" swap$ * ")" * } + if$ +} +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } +INTEGERS { etal } +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #5 > + s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #5 > and + or 'etal := + etal + { #5 #1 + 'namesleft := } + { numnames 'namesleft := } + if$ + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first + t "others" = + 'skip$ + { t "u" change.case$ 't := } + if$ + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { nameptr #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + etal or + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {first.page} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ +} +% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if +% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string +% if they're both empty. +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { "" } + 'year + if$ +} +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END +INTEGERS { multiresult } +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.pages.a} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { "p." pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null embolden + " " swap$ * * + format.date empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.date paren } + { " " * format.date paren * } + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages.a } + { " " * pages first.page *} + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "in " booktitle emphasize * } + { "in " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and +% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In " journal * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either +% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on +% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal field.or.null + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} +MACRO {may} {"May"} +MACRO {jun} {"June"} +MACRO {jul} {"July"} +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} +MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} +%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 +%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> +%% Change file names in leading comment +% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation +% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. +% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 +% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the +% corresponding changes to +% phyjabb.bib +% phyjabb.btx +MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} +MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} +MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} +MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} +MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} +MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} +MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} +MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} +MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} +MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} +MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} +MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} +MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} +MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} +MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} +MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} +MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} +MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} +MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} +MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} +MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} +MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} +MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} +MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} +MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} +MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} +MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} +MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} +MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} +MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} +MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} +MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} +MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} +MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} +MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} +MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} +MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} +MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} +MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} +MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} +MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} +MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} +MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} +MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} +MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} +MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. +READ +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END +% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. +% We use either the sorted order or original order. +% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +STRINGS { longest.label } +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {begin.bib} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} +% Now we produce the output for all the entries +ITERATE {call.type$} +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phpf.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phpf.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a55d62d9e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phpf.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1877 @@ +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). +% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. +% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. +% These are the original macros + % For Physics of Fluids, which now wants ALL the authors + % (Same as AIP but infinite names, abbreviate pages, and + % alternate incollection) +% This is the start of btxbst.doc +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +%# define PLAIN 1 +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). + month +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. + { label } +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders +STRINGS { s t } +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { "," * write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} +% This function finishes all entries. +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ skip$ +} +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {paren} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "(" swap$ * ")" * } + if$ +} +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.edited} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "edited by " editor format.names * } + if$ +} +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {first.page} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ +} +% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if +% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string +% if they're both empty. +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { "" } + 'year + if$ +} +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END +INTEGERS { multiresult } +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.pages.a} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { "p." pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null embolden + " " swap$ * * + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages.a } + { ", " * pages first.page * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "in " booktitle emphasize * } + { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and +% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In " journal * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either +% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on +% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal field.or.null + format.vol.num.pages + format.date empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.date paren } + { " " * format.date paren * } + if$ + } + if$ + output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} +MACRO {may} {"May"} +MACRO {jun} {"June"} +MACRO {jul} {"July"} +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} +MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} +%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 +%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> +%% Change file names in leading comment +% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation +% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. +% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 +% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the +% corresponding changes to +% phyjabb.bib +% phyjabb.btx +MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} +MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} +MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} +MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} +MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} +MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} +MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} +MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} +MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} +MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} +MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} +MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} +MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} +MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} +MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} +MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} +MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} +MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} +MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} +MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} +MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} +MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} +MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} +MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} +MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} +MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} +MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} +MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} +MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} +MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} +MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} +MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} +MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} +MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} +MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} +MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} +MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} +MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} +MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} +MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} +MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} +MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} +MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} +MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} +MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} +MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. +READ +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END +% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. +% We use either the sorted order or original order. +% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +STRINGS { longest.label } +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {begin.bib} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} +% Now we produce the output for all the entries +ITERATE {call.type$} +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phppcf.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phppcf.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2ca7056ef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phppcf.bst @@ -0,0 +1,2009 @@ +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). +% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. +% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. +% These are the original macros + % A physics version of APALIKE +% This is the start of btxbst.doc +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +% BibTeX `apalike' bibliography style (24-Jan-88 version) +% Adapted from the `alpha' style, version 0.99a; for BibTeX version 0.99a. +% Copyright (C) 1988, all rights reserved. +% Copying of this file is allowed, provided that if you make any changes at all +% you name it something other than `apalike.bst'. +% This restriction helps ensure that all copies are identical. +% Differences between this style and `alpha' are generally heralded by a `%'. +% The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for alpha.bst. +% +% This style should be used with the `apalike' LaTeX style (apalike.sty). +% \cite's come out like "(Jones, 1986)" in the text but there are no labels +% in the bibliography, and something like "(1986)" comes out immediately +% after the author. Author (and editor) names appear as last name, comma, +% initials. A `year' field is required for every entry, and so is either +% an author (or in some cases, an editor) field or a key field. +% +% Editorial note: +% Many journals require a style like `apalike', but I strongly, strongly, +% strongly recommend that you not use it if you have a choice---use something +% like `plain' instead. Mary-Claire van Leunen (A Handbook for Scholars, +% Knopf, 1979) argues convincingly that a style like `plain' encourages better +% writing than one like `apalike'. Furthermore the strongest arguments for +% using an author-date style like `apalike'---that it's "the most practical" +% (The Chicago Manual of Style, University of Chicago Press, thirteenth +% edition, 1982, pages 400--401)---fall flat on their face with the new +% computer-typesetting technology. For instance page 401 anachronistically +% states "The chief disadvantage of [a style like `plain'] is that additions +% or deletions cannot be made after the manuscript is typed without changing +% numbers in both text references and list." LaTeX sidesteps the disadvantage. +% +% History: +% 15-sep-86 (SK,OP) Original version, by Susan King and Oren Patashnik. +% 10-nov-86 (OP) Truncated the sort.key$ string to the correct length +% in bib.sort.order to eliminate error message. +% 24-jan-88 (OP) Updated for BibTeX version 0.99a, from alpha.bst 0.99a; +% apalike now sorts by author, then year, then title; +% THIS `apalike' VERSION DOES NOT WORK WITH BIBTEX 0.98i. +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% 1: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% 1: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% 0: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% 1: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +%# define PLAIN 1 +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). +% month not used in apalike +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. + { label extra.label sort.label } +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders +STRINGS { s t } +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +% apalike needs this function because +% the year has special punctuation; +% apalike ignores the month +FUNCTION {output.year.check} +{ year empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } + { write$ + " (" year * extra.label * ")" * + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} +% This function finishes all entries. +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {caps} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first + t "others" = + 'skip$ + { t caps 't := } + if$ + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " {\em et~al.}" * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.key} % this function is just for apalike +{ empty$ + { key field.or.null } + { "" } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + 'title + if$ +} +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END +INTEGERS { multiresult } +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null embolden + " " swap$ * * + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ", " * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "In " booktitle emphasize * } + { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ "In" % this is for apalike + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * % this is for apalike +} +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ "In" % this is for apalike + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal emphasize + format.vol.num.pages output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + output.year.check % special for apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + howpublished output + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + output.year.check % special for apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address output % for apalike + new.sentence % there's no year + organization output % here so things + publisher output % are simpler + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + format.edition output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title output + new.block + howpublished output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.editors output + editor format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address output % for apalike + new.sentence % we always output + organization output % a nonempty organization + publisher output % here + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + fin.entry +} +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated +MACRO {jan} {"January"} +MACRO {feb} {"February"} +MACRO {mar} {"March"} +MACRO {apr} {"April"} +MACRO {may} {"May"} +MACRO {jun} {"June"} +MACRO {jul} {"July"} +MACRO {aug} {"August"} +MACRO {sep} {"September"} +MACRO {oct} {"October"} +MACRO {nov} {"November"} +MACRO {dec} {"December"} +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} +%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 +%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> +%% Change file names in leading comment +% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation +% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. +% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 +% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the +% corresponding changes to +% phyjabb.bib +% phyjabb.btx +MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} +MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} +MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} +MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} +MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} +MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} +MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} +MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} +MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} +MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} +MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} +MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} +MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} +MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} +MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} +MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} +MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} +MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} +MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} +MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} +MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} +MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} +MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} +MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} +MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} +MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} +MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} +MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} +MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} +MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} +MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} +MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} +MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} +MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} +MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} +MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} +MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} +MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} +MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} +MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} +MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} +MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} +MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} +MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} +MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} +MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. +READ +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} +INTEGERS { len } +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END +% There are three apalike cases: one person (Jones), +% two (Jones and de~Bruijn), and more (Jones et~al.). +% This function is much like format.crossref.editors. +% +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := + s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ caps + s num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " {\em et~al.}" * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " {\em et~al.}" * } + { " and " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ caps * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key % apalike uses the whole key + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key % apalike uses the whole key + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {editor.key.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key % apalike uses the whole key, no organization + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.label % apalike ignores organization + 'author.key.label % for labeling and sorting + if$ + } + if$ + ", " % these three lines are + * % for apalike, which + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ % uses all four digits + * + 'label := +} +% It doesn't seem like a particularly good idea to use an order-of-citation +% reference list when using alphabetic labels, but we need to have a +% special pass to calculate labels when this happens. +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ % apalike uses initials + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := % <= here + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +% The sort.format.title function returns the argument, +% but first any leading "A "'s, "An "'s, or "The "'s are removed. +% The chop.word function uses s, so we need another string variable, t +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} +% The auxiliary functions here, for the presort function, are analogous to +% the ones for calc.label; the same comments apply, except that the +% organization field takes precedence here over the key field. For sorting +% purposes, we still remove a leading "The " from the organization field. +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {editor.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} +% apalike uses two sorting passes; the first one sets the +% labels so that the `a's, `b's, etc. can be computed; +% the second pass puts the references in "correct" order. +% The presort function is for the first pass. It computes +% label, sort.label, and title, and then concatenates. +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + label sortify + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ % for + 'sort.label := % apalike + sort.label % style + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} +ITERATE {presort} +% And now we can sort +SORT % by label, sort.label, title---for final label calculation +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END +STRINGS { last.label next.extra } % apalike labels are only for the text; +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } % there are none in the bibliography +FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} % and hence there is no `longest.label' +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.label label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + label 'last.label := + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + label extra.label * 'label := + extra.label 'next.extra := +} +EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} +ITERATE {forward.pass} +REVERSE {reverse.pass} +% Now that the label is right we sort for real, +% on sort.label then year then title. This is +% for the second sorting pass. +FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} +{ sort.label + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} +ITERATE {bib.sort.order} +SORT % by sort.label, year, title---giving final bibliography order +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ % no \etalchar in apalike + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ % no labels in apalike +} +EXECUTE {begin.bib} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} +% Now we produce the output for all the entries +ITERATE {call.type$} +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phreport.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phreport.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..919ab181cb --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phreport.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1885 @@ +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). +% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. +% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. +% These are the original macros + % For internal reports +% same as AIP except for 0, 0, 0, +% 0, 0, 0 +% This is the start of btxbst.doc +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% 0: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +%# define PLAIN 1 +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). + month +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. + { label } +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders +STRINGS { s t } +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { "," * write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} +% This function finishes all entries. +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ skip$ +} +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {paren} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "(" swap$ * ")" * } + if$ +} +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.edited} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "edited by " editor format.names * } + if$ +} +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + 'title + if$ +} +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} +% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if +% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string +% if they're both empty. +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { month empty$ + { "" } + { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ + month + } + if$ + } + { month empty$ + 'year + { month " " * year * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END +INTEGERS { multiresult } +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null embolden + " " swap$ * * + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ", " * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "in " booktitle emphasize * } + { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and +% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In " journal * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either +% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on +% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal field.or.null + format.vol.num.pages + format.date empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.date paren } + { " " * format.date paren * } + if$ + } + if$ + output + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} +MACRO {may} {"May"} +MACRO {jun} {"June"} +MACRO {jul} {"July"} +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} +MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} +%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 +%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> +%% Change file names in leading comment +% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation +% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. +% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 +% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the +% corresponding changes to +% phyjabb.bib +% phyjabb.btx +MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} +MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} +MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} +MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} +MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} +MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} +MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} +MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} +MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} +MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} +MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} +MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} +MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} +MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} +MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} +MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} +MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} +MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} +MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} +MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} +MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} +MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} +MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} +MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} +MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} +MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} +MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} +MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} +MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} +MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} +MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} +MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} +MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} +MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} +MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} +MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} +MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} +MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} +MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} +MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} +MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} +MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} +MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} +MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} +MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} +MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. +READ +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END +% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. +% We use either the sorted order or original order. +% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +STRINGS { longest.label } +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {begin.bib} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} +% Now we produce the output for all the entries +ITERATE {call.type$} +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phrmp.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phrmp.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b6dd3b0d62 --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/phrmp.bst @@ -0,0 +1,2150 @@ +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). +% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create 1-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. +% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. +% These are the original macros + % For Reviews of Modern Physics, +% except first name not inverted yet and order of fields not hacked +% This is the start of btxbst.doc +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% 1: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% 1: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +%# define PLAIN 1 +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). + month +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. + { label extra.label sort.label } +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders +STRINGS { s t } +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { "," * write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ + "\bibitem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} +% This function finishes all entries. +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ skip$ +} +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {bracket} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "[" swap$ * "]" * } + if$ +} +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.edited} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "edited by " editor format.names * } + if$ +} +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + { title "t" change.case$ } + if$ +} +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} +FUNCTION {first.page} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ +} +% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if +% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string +% if they're both empty. +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { month empty$ + { "" } + { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ + month + } + if$ + } + { month empty$ + 'year + { month " " * year * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END +INTEGERS { multiresult } +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {format.pages.a} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { "p." pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null embolden + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages.a } + { ":" * pages first.page * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "in " booktitle emphasize * } + { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and +% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + key empty$ not and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In " journal * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either +% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on +% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + fin.entry +} +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} +MACRO {may} {"May"} +MACRO {jun} {"June"} +MACRO {jul} {"July"} +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} +MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} +%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 +%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> +%% Change file names in leading comment +% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation +% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. +% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 +% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the +% corresponding changes to +% phyjabb.bib +% phyjabb.btx +MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} +MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} +MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} +MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} +MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} +MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} +MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} +MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} +MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} +MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} +MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} +MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} +MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} +MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} +MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} +MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} +MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} +MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} +MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} +MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} +MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} +MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} +MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} +MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} +MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} +MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} +MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} +MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} +MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} +MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} +MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} +MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} +MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} +MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} +MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} +MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} +MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} +MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} +MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} +MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} +MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} +MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} +MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} +MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} +MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} +MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} +MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} +MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. +READ +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} +INTEGERS { len } +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END +INTEGERS { et.al.char.used } +FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used} +{ #0 'et.al.char.used := +} +EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used} +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #1 > + { numnames #2 > + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ " et~al." * } + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ + s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " et~al." * } + { " and " * s #2 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #9 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #9 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {calc.label} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.key.organization.label + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.key.organization.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + duplicate$ + " " * year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ + * + 'label := + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ + * + sortify 'sort.label := +} +% It doesn't seem like a particularly good idea to use an order-of-citation +% reference list when using alphabetic labels, but we need to have a +% special pass to calculate labels when this happens. +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ % apalike uses initials + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := % <= here + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} +% The sort.format.title function returns the argument, +% but first any leading "A "'s, "An "'s, or "The "'s are removed. +% The chop.word function uses s, so we need another string variable, t +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} +% The auxiliary functions here, for the presort function, are analogous to +% the ones for calc.label; the same comments apply, except that the +% organization field takes precedence here over the key field. For sorting +% purposes, we still remove a leading "The " from the organization field. +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} +{ author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} +% There is a limit, entry.max$, on the length of an entry string variable +% (which is what its sort.key$ is), so we take at most that many characters +% of the constructed key, and hope there aren't many references that match +% to that many characters! +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + sort.label + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.organization.sort + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.organization.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + * + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} +ITERATE {presort} +% And now we can sort +SORT +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END +STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra } +INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num } +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'longest.label.width := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.sort.label sort.label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + sort.label 'last.sort.label := + } + if$ +} +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + label extra.label * 'label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + extra.label 'next.extra := +} +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} +ITERATE {forward.pass} +REVERSE {reverse.pass} +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ et.al.char.used + { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {begin.bib} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} +% Now we produce the output for all the entries +ITERATE {call.type$} +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/physics.bst b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/physics.bst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..501c70067d --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/contrib/physics.bst @@ -0,0 +1,3520 @@ +%NAME: physics.bst +% BibTeX styles for various physics journals. +% This file, physics.bst, is based on the file btxbst.doc. + % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney%PPC.MFEnet@NMFECC.ARPA) + % of any bugs, improvements, etc. + +% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written +% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put +% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles +% "C preprocessor" +% t) +% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with +% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.bst +% and run cpp with e.g., +% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> +% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. + +% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) +% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles +% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last +% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. +% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles +% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles +% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers +% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) +% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles +% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles +% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets +% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles +% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries +% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. +% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals +% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation +% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note +% NOTE_BRACKET: put note in brackets +% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) +% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. +% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" +% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels +% KEY_CITE: use key as label +% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations +% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps +% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name +% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. + +% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. +% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. +% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to +% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. + +# define ATIT_SUPPRESS 0 +# define NAME_INVERT 0 +# define NAME_UPPER 0 +# define MONTH_SUPPRESS 0 +# define PAREN_DATE 0 +# define DATE_FIRST 0 +# define VOLUME_SPACE 0 +# define NUM_SUPPRESS 0 +# define BOLD_VOL 0 +# define BRACKET_NOTE 0 +# define PAGE_START_J 0 +# define PAGE_START_O 0 +# define PAGE_ABBREV 0 +# define PHYSICS_JOUR 0 +# define COMMA_DELIMIT 0 +# define NOTE_SUPPRESS 0 +# define NOTE_BRACKET 0 +# define MAX_NAMES 0 +# define MIN_NAMES 0 +# define EDIT_VAR 0 +# define RMP_LABELS 0 +# define KEY_CITE 0 +# define NAMED_REFS 0 +# define CSC_NAMES 0 +# define JOUR_DEEMPH 0 +# define ETAL_EMPH 0 + +% These are the original macros +# define LAB_ALPH 0 +# define SORTED 0 +# define NAME_FULL 0 +# define ATIT_LOWER 0 +# define MONTH_FULL 0 +# define JOUR_FULL 0 + +#ifdef AIP + % For American Institute of Physics Journals +# define ATIT_SUPPRESS 1 +# define PAGE_START_J 1 +# define PHYSICS_JOUR 1 +# define MAX_NAMES 5 +# define MIN_NAMES 1 +# define EDIT_VAR 1 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define COMMA_DELIMIT 1 +# define VOLUME_SPACE 1 +# define MONTH_SUPPRESS 1 +# define PAREN_DATE 1 +# define NUM_SUPPRESS 1 +# define BOLD_VOL 1 +# define JOUR_DEEMPH 1 +#endif +#ifdef NF + % For Nuclear Fusion +% same as AIP except for NAME_INVERT, NAME_UPPER, DATE_FIRST and +% MIN_NAMES and MAX_NAMES set to 0 (infinity) +# define ATIT_SUPPRESS 1 +# define PAGE_START_J 1 +# define PHYSICS_JOUR 1 +# define EDIT_VAR 1 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define COMMA_DELIMIT 1 +# define VOLUME_SPACE 1 +# define MONTH_SUPPRESS 1 +# define PAREN_DATE 1 +# define NUM_SUPPRESS 1 +# define BOLD_VOL 1 +# define NAME_INVERT 1 +# define NAME_UPPER 1 +# define DATE_FIRST 1 +# define JOUR_DEEMPH 1 +#endif +#ifdef NFLET + % For Nuclear Fusion Letters +% same as NF except for MIN_NAMES and MAX_NAMES set to 5 +# define ATIT_SUPPRESS 1 +# define PAGE_START_J 1 +# define PHYSICS_JOUR 1 +# define EDIT_VAR 1 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define COMMA_DELIMIT 1 +# define VOLUME_SPACE 1 +# define MONTH_SUPPRESS 1 +# define PAREN_DATE 1 +# define NUM_SUPPRESS 1 +# define BOLD_VOL 1 +# define NAME_INVERT 1 +# define NAME_UPPER 1 +# define DATE_FIRST 1 +# define MAX_NAMES 5 +# define MIN_NAMES 5 +# define JOUR_DEEMPH 1 +#endif +#ifdef IAEA + % For IAEA Conferences +% same as NF except for MIN_NAMES and MAX_NAMES set to 1 +# define ATIT_SUPPRESS 1 +# define PAGE_START_J 1 +# define PHYSICS_JOUR 1 +# define EDIT_VAR 1 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define COMMA_DELIMIT 1 +# define VOLUME_SPACE 1 +# define MONTH_SUPPRESS 1 +# define PAREN_DATE 1 +# define NUM_SUPPRESS 1 +# define BOLD_VOL 1 +# define NAME_INVERT 1 +# define NAME_UPPER 1 +# define DATE_FIRST 1 +# define MAX_NAMES 1 +# define MIN_NAMES 1 +# define JOUR_DEEMPH 1 +#endif +#ifdef CPC + % For Computer Physics Communications +% same as AIP except for NAME_INVERT, DATE_FIRST +# define ATIT_SUPPRESS 1 +# define PAGE_START_J 1 +# define PHYSICS_JOUR 1 +# define MAX_NAMES 5 +# define MIN_NAMES 1 +# define EDIT_VAR 1 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define COMMA_DELIMIT 1 +# define VOLUME_SPACE 1 +# define MONTH_SUPPRESS 1 +# define PAREN_DATE 1 +# define NUM_SUPPRESS 1 +# define BOLD_VOL 1 +# define NAME_INVERT 1 +# define DATE_FIRST 1 +# define JOUR_DEEMPH 1 +#endif +#ifdef RMP + % For Reviews of Modern Physics, +% except first name not inverted yet and order of fields not hacked +# define LAB_ALPH 1 +# define SORTED 1 +# define RMP_LABELS 1 +# define ATIT_SUPPRESS 1 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define MONTH_SUPRESS 1 +# define NUM_SUPPRESS 1 +# define VOL_SUPPRESS 1 +# define BOLD_VOL 1 +# define BRACKET_NOTE 1 +# define PAGE_START_J 1 +# define PAGE_START_O 1 +# define PAGE_ABBREV 1 +# define PHYSICS_JOUR 1 +# define COMMA_DELIMIT 1 +# define EDIT_VAR 1 +# define JOUR_DEEMPH 1 +#endif +#ifdef REPORT + % For internal reports +% same as AIP except for ATIT_SUPPRESS, MONTH_SUPPRESS, PAGE_START_J, +% NUM_SUPPRESS, MAX_NAMES, MIN_NAMES +# define PHYSICS_JOUR 1 +# define EDIT_VAR 1 +# define ATIT_LOWER 0 +# define COMMA_DELIMIT 1 +# define VOLUME_SPACE 1 +# define PAREN_DATE 1 +# define BOLD_VOL 1 +# define JOUR_DEEMPH 1 +#endif +#ifdef APALIKE + % For American Psychological Association + % (same as ALPHA but with NAMED_REFS set and NAME_FULL unset) +# define LAB_ALPH 1 +# define SORTED 1 +# define NAME_FULL 0 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define MONTH_FULL 1 +# define JOUR_FULL 1 +# define NAMED_REFS 1 +# define NAME_INVERT 1 +#endif +#ifdef PPCF + % A physics version of APALIKE +# define PHYSICS_JOUR 1 +# define LAB_ALPH 1 +# define SORTED 1 +# define NAME_FULL 0 +# define ATIT_LOWER 0 +# define ATIT_SUPPRESS 1 +# define MONTH_FULL 1 +# define JOUR_FULL 0 +# define NAMED_REFS 1 +# define NAME_INVERT 1 +# define ETAL_EMPH 1 +# define CSC_NAMES 1 +# define NUM_SUPPRESS 1 +# define BOLD_VOL 1 +# define VOLUME_SPACE 1 +#endif + +% This is the start of btxbst.doc + +% BibTeX `plain' family + % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. + % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. + % Copying of this file is authorized only if either + % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or + % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than + % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. + % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. + % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. +#if NAMED_REFS +% BibTeX `apalike' bibliography style (24-Jan-88 version) +% Adapted from the `alpha' style, version 0.99a; for BibTeX version 0.99a. +% Copyright (C) 1988, all rights reserved. +% Copying of this file is allowed, provided that if you make any changes at all +% you name it something other than `apalike.bst'. +% This restriction helps ensure that all copies are identical. +% Differences between this style and `alpha' are generally heralded by a `%'. +% The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for alpha.bst. +% +% This style should be used with the `apalike' LaTeX style (apalike.sty). +% \cite's come out like "(Jones, 1986)" in the text but there are no labels +% in the bibliography, and something like "(1986)" comes out immediately +% after the author. Author (and editor) names appear as last name, comma, +% initials. A `year' field is required for every entry, and so is either +% an author (or in some cases, an editor) field or a key field. +% +% Editorial note: +% Many journals require a style like `apalike', but I strongly, strongly, +% strongly recommend that you not use it if you have a choice---use something +% like `plain' instead. Mary-Claire van Leunen (A Handbook for Scholars, +% Knopf, 1979) argues convincingly that a style like `plain' encourages better +% writing than one like `apalike'. Furthermore the strongest arguments for +% using an author-date style like `apalike'---that it's "the most practical" +% (The Chicago Manual of Style, University of Chicago Press, thirteenth +% edition, 1982, pages 400--401)---fall flat on their face with the new +% computer-typesetting technology. For instance page 401 anachronistically +% states "The chief disadvantage of [a style like `plain'] is that additions +% or deletions cannot be made after the manuscript is typed without changing +% numbers in both text references and list." LaTeX sidesteps the disadvantage. +% +% History: +% 15-sep-86 (SK,OP) Original version, by Susan King and Oren Patashnik. +% 10-nov-86 (OP) Truncated the sort.key$ string to the correct length +% in bib.sort.order to eliminate error message. +% 24-jan-88 (OP) Updated for BibTeX version 0.99a, from alpha.bst 0.99a; +% apalike now sorts by author, then year, then title; +% THIS `apalike' VERSION DOES NOT WORK WITH BIBTEX 0.98i. +#endif APALIKE +% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in +% these standard styles or in this documentation file. +% +% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, +% and is also a template file that you can use to make +% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. +% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like +% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt +% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt +% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt +% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt +% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. +% If you don't have access, +% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, +% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. +% +% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain +% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence +% #if VAR +% lines to be included when VAR is not zero +% #else +% lines to be included when VAR is zero +% #endif +% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of +% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. +% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. +% Variables can be set by +% #define VAR value +% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef +% to see if it has none. +% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines +% after the #if only if VAR is zero. +% +% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables +% so you can spot them easily +% +% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA +% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), +% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the +% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. +% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. +% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: +% LAB_ALPH: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric +% label is used) +% SORTED: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) +% and other info, like authors (if false, then +% entries remain in order of occurrence) +% NAME_FULL: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as +% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first +% names become initials) +% ATIT_LOWER: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be +% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or +% first letter after a colon +% (if false then they appear as in the database) +% MONTH_FULL: months are spelled out in full (if false, then +% they're abbreviated) +% JOUR_FULL: macro journal names are spelled out in full +% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently +% as they appear in ACM publications) +#ifndef UNSRT +# ifndef ALPHA +# ifndef ABBRV +%# define PLAIN 1 +# endif +# endif +#endif +#ifdef PLAIN +% plain style (sorted numbers) +# define LAB_ALPH 0 +# define SORTED 1 +# define NAME_FULL 1 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define MONTH_FULL 1 +# define JOUR_FULL 1 +#endif +#ifdef UNSRT +% unsrt style (unsorted numbers) +# define LAB_ALPH 0 +# define SORTED 0 +# define NAME_FULL 1 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define MONTH_FULL 1 +# define JOUR_FULL 1 +#endif +#ifdef ALPHA +% alpha style (sorted short alphabetics) +# define LAB_ALPH 1 +# define SORTED 1 +# define NAME_FULL 1 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define MONTH_FULL 1 +# define JOUR_FULL 1 +#endif +#ifdef ABBRV +% abbrv style (sorted numbers, with abbreviations) +# define LAB_ALPH 0 +# define SORTED 1 +# define NAME_FULL 0 +# define ATIT_LOWER 1 +# define MONTH_FULL 0 +# define JOUR_FULL 0 +#endif +% +% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen +% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized +% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence +% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). +% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry +% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) +% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break +% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, +% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; +% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. +% +% Citation alphabetic label format: +% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) +% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors +% +% Citation label numberic format: +% [number] +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: +% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever +% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, +% then title +% +% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: +% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes +% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title +% +% Reference list ordering for unsorted: +% by the order cited in the text +% +% History +% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. +% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. +% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. +% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. +% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. +% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: +% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; +% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. +% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: +% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; +% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; +% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace +% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; +% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; +% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; +% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a +% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; +% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; +% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just +% the fields they're supposed to; +% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; +% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. +% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; +% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow +% either volume or number, not just volume; +% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; +% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field +% to tell where a conference was held; +% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume +% or number, and also a series field; +% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than +% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; +% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; +% MANUAL now prints out the organization in +% the first block if the author field is empty; +% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. +% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three +% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this +% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the +% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. +% +% The ENTRY declaration +% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), +% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. +% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't +% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields +% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. + +ENTRY +% Fields: + { address +% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. +% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the +% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major +% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, +% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry +% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if +% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. +% annote +% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). + author +% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. + booktitle +% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. +% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. + chapter +% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. + edition +% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). + editor +% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. +% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be +% for the book or collection that the work appears in. + howpublished +% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). + institution +% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. + journal +% Journal name (macros are provided for many). + key +% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key +% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). +#if !NAMED_REFS + month +#else NAMED_REFS +% month not used in apalike +#endif +% Month (macros are provided). + note +% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). + number +% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. + organization +% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if +% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces +% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately +% condensed organization information in the key field as well. + pages +% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' +% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). + publisher +% Publisher name. + school +% School name (for theses). + series +% The name of a series or set of books. +% An individual book will will also have it's own title. + title +% The title of the thing you're referred to. + type +% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of +% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a +% thesis; or of a part of a book. + volume +% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. + year +% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end +% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). + } +% There are no integer entry variables + {} +% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. +% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. +#if LAB_ALPH +#if SORTED + { label extra.label sort.label } +#else !SORTED +% It doesn't seem like a good idea to use an order-of-citation +% reference list when using alphabetic labels, but when this happens +% we do things a little differently + { label } +#endif SORTED +#else !LAB_ALPH + { label } +#endif LAB_ALPH + +% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the +% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields +% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions +% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), +% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. +% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the +% entry. +% +% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': +% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent +% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than +% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to +% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should +% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be +% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is +% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two +% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between +% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two +% successive new.block's. +% +% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. +% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be +% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come +% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending +% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. +% +% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. +% It will be one of these values: +% before.all just after the \bibitem +% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed +% if more sentence is output +% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed +% after.block just after a block (and sentence): +% period and \newblock needed. +% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence +% +% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output +% +% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) +% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed +% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of +% occurrence. +% +% output.nonnull(s) == +% BEGIN +% s := argument on stack +% if output.state = mid.sentence then +% write$(pop() * ", ") +% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top +% else +% if output.state = after.block then +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% write$("\newblock ") +% else +% if output.state = before.all then +% write$(pop()) +% else -- output.state should be after.sentence +% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") +% fi +% fi +% output.state := mid.sentence +% fi +% push s on stack +% END +% +% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; +% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) +% +% output(s) == +% BEGIN +% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if +% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty +% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; +% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when +% such fields are empty). +% +% output.check(s,t) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) +% else output.nonnull(s) +% fi +% END +% +% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry +% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator +% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack +% as per the output convention. +% +% output.bibitem == +% BEGIN +% newline$ +% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, +% write$(label) % these three lines +% write$("]{") % are used +% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels +% write$(cite$) +% write$("}") +% push "" on stack +% output.state := before.all +% END +% +% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the +% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all +% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, +% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the +% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) +% +% fin.entry == +% BEGIN +% write$(add.period$(pop())) +% newline$ +% END +% +% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and +% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. +% +% new.block == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.block +% fi +% END +% +% new.sentence == +% BEGIN +% if output.state <> after.block then +% if output.state <> before.all then +% output.state := after.sentence +% fi +% fi +% END +% + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +% the variables s and t are temporary string holders + +STRINGS { s t } + +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = +#if !COMMA_DELIMIT + { add.period$ write$ +#else COMMA_DELIMIT + { "," * write$ +#endif + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +#if NAMED_REFS +% apalike needs this function because +% the year has special punctuation; +% apalike ignores the month +FUNCTION {output.year.check} +{ year empty$ + { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } + { write$ + " (" year * extra.label * ")" * + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ +} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ newline$ +#if LAB_ALPH + "\bibitem[" write$ + label write$ + "]{" write$ +#else + "\bibitem{" write$ +#endif LAB_ALPH + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +% This function finishes all entries. + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +#if !COMMA_DELIMIT +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +#else COMMA_DELIMIT +{ skip$ +#endif +} + +% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack +% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. +% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because +% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The +% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; +% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. + +#if !NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} +#endif !NAMED_REFS + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +#if !NAMED_REFS +% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} +#endif !NAMED_REFS + +% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. +% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by +% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), +% or they produce the null string. +% +% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the +% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no +% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) +% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. +% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. +% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the +% stack is a string rather than a missing field. +% +% field.or.null(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return s +% END +% +% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, +% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic +% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation +% will follow the result. +% +% emphasize(s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then return "" +% else return "{\em " * s * "}" +% +% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in +% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas +% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last +% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always +% contain at least one name. +% +% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER +% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% format.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% nameptr := 1 +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% namesleft := numnames +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% % for full names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% % for abbreviated first names: +% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") +% if nameptr > 1 then +% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t +% else if numnames > 2 +% then nameresult := nameresult * "," +% fi +% if t = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." +% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t +% fi +% fi +% else nameresult := t +% fi +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% return nameresult +% END +% +% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) +% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string +% +% format.authors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then return "" +% else return format.names(author) +% fi +% END +% +% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, +% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" +% +% format.editors == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(editor) then return "" +% else +% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then +% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" +% else +% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" +% fi +% fi +% END +% +% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be +% given for them. +% +% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and +% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +#if CSC_NAMES +FUNCTION {caps} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +#endif + +#if BOLD_VOL +FUNCTION {embolden} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} +#endif + +#if BRACKET_NOTE +FUNCTION {bracket} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "[" swap$ * "]" * } + if$ +} +#endif + +#if PAREN_DATE +FUNCTION {paren} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "(" swap$ * ")" * } + if$ +} +#endif + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +#if MAX_NAMES +INTEGERS { etal } +#endif + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := +#if !MAX_NAMES + numnames 'namesleft := +#else MAX_NAMES + numnames #MAX_NAMES > + s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #MIN_NAMES > and + or 'etal := + etal + { #MIN_NAMES #1 + 'namesleft := } + { numnames 'namesleft := } + if$ +#endif + { namesleft #0 > } +#if NAME_FULL +#if !NAME_INVERT + { s nameptr "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := +#else NAME_INVERT + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" format.name$ 't := +#endif +#else +#if !NAME_INVERT + { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := +#else NAME_INVERT + { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first +#endif +#endif NAME_FULL +#if NAME_UPPER + t "others" = + 'skip$ + { t "u" change.case$ 't := } + if$ +#endif +#if CSC_NAMES + t "others" = + 'skip$ + { t caps 't := } + if$ +#endif + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } +#if !MAX_NAMES + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = +#if !ETAL_EMPH + { " et~al." * } +#else ETAL_EMPH + { " {\em et~al.}" * } +#endif ETAL_EMPH + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } +#else MAX_NAMES + { nameptr #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + etal or +#if !ETAL_EMPH + { " et~al." * } +#else ETAL_EMPH + { " {\em et~al.}" * } +#endif ETAL_EMPH + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } +#endif + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} + +#if NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {format.key} % this function is just for apalike +{ empty$ + { key field.or.null } + { "" } + if$ +} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +#if EDIT_VAR +FUNCTION {format.edited} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { "edited by " editor format.names * } + if$ +} +#endif + +% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. +% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, +% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), +% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; +% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } +#if ATIT_LOWER + { title "t" change.case$ } +#else + 'title +#endif ATIT_LOWER + if$ +} + +% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX +% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. +% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to +% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. +% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) + +% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' +% if it's not already +% +% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) +% +% n.dashify(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% pageresult := "" +% while (not empty$(t)) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-") +% then +% if (next character isn't) +% then +% pageresult := pageresult * "--" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% else +% while (first character of t = "-") +% do +% pageresult := pageresult * "-" +% t := t with the "-" removed +% od +% fi +% else +% pageresult := pageresult * the first character +% t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return pageresult +% END + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +#define TEMP 0 +#if PAGE_START_J +#define TEMP 1 +#endif +#if PAGE_START_O +#define TEMP 1 +#endif + +#if TEMP +FUNCTION {first.page} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ +} +#endif + +#if !NAMED_REFS +% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if +% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string +% if they're both empty. + +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ +#if !MONTH_SUPPRESS + { month empty$ + { "" } + { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ + month + } + if$ + } + { month empty$ + 'year + { month " " * year * } + if$ + } +#else MONTH_SUPPRESS + { "" } + 'year +#endif + if$ +} +#endif !NAMED_REFS + +% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like +% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a +% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). +% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two +% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between +% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: +% +% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == +% BEGIN +% if text.length$(str2) < 3 +% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 +% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 +% END + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair +% are nonempty. +% +% either.or.check(t,s) == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(s) then +% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) +% fi +% END + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps +% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field +% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume +% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), +% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name +% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to +% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the +% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either +% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. +% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field +% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title +% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". +% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. +% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because +% this doesn't start a sentence. + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book +% (and in rare circumstances, an article). +% +% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" +% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. +% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" +% +% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) +% +% multi.page.check(s) == +% BEGIN +% t := s +% multiresult := false +% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) +% do +% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") +% then multiresult := true +% else t := t with the first character removed +% fi +% od +% return multiresult +% END + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. +% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check +#if !PAGE_ABBREV + { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } +#else PAGE_ABBREV + { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } +#endif + if$ + } + if$ +} + +#if TEMP +FUNCTION {format.pages.a} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } +#if !PAGE_ABBREV + { "page" pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } +#else PAGE_ABBREV + { "p." pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } +#endif + if$ +} +#endif + +% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range +% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some +% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +#if !BOLD_VOL +{ volume field.or.null +#else BOLD_VOL +{ volume field.or.null embolden +#endif +#if VOLUME_SPACE + " " swap$ * * +#endif +#if !NUM_SUPPRESS + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ +#endif +#if DATE_FIRST + format.date empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.date paren } + { " " * format.date paren * } + if$ + } + if$ +#endif + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ +#if !PAGE_START_J + { pop$ format.pages } +#else PAGE_START_J + { pop$ format.pages.a } +#endif +#if !PAGE_START_J +#if !DATE_FIRST +#if !VOLUME_SPACE + { ":" * pages n.dashify * } +#else VOLUME_SPACE + { ", " * pages n.dashify * } +#endif +#else DATE_FIRST + { " " * pages n.dashify *} +#endif +#else PAGE_START_J +#if !DATE_FIRST +#if !VOLUME_SPACE + { ":" * pages first.page * } +#else VOLUME_SPACE + { ", " * pages first.page * } +#endif +#else DATE_FIRST + { " " * pages first.page *} +#endif +#endif + if$ + } + if$ +} + + +% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the +% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. +% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence +% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one +% exists. + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ +#if !COMMA_DELIMIT + { "In " booktitle emphasize * } +#if !EDIT_VAR + { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } +#else EDIT_VAR + { "In " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } +#endif +#else COMMA_DELIMIT + { "in " booktitle emphasize * } +#if !EDIT_VAR + { "in " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } +#else EDIT_VAR + { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } +#endif +#endif + if$ + } + if$ +} + +#if !NAMED_REFS +% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and +% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and +#if SORTED + key empty$ not and +#else !SORTED +#if LAB_ALPH + key empty$ not and +#endif LAB_ALPH +#endif SORTED + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} +#endif + +% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, +% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack +% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" +% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; +% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. +% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because +% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving +% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature +% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled +% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for +% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; +% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; +% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Each of these is explained in more detail later. +% +% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is +% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- +% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be +% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). +% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry +% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. +% +% format.article.crossref == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(key) then +% if empty$(journal) then +% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * +% " to crossref " * crossref) +% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% else +% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * +% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% else +% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") +% fi +% END +% +% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. + +#if !NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } +#if !JOUR_DEEMPH + { "In {\em " journal * "\/}" * } +#else JOUR_DEEMPH + { "In " journal * } +#endif + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +#else NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ "In" % this is for apalike + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +#if !NAMED_REFS +% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either +% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on +% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. + +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +#if !CSC_NAMES +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ +#else CSC_NAMES +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ caps +#endif + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > +#if !ETAL_EMPH + { pop$ " et~al." * } +#else ETAL_EMPH + { pop$ " {\em et~al.}" * } +#endif ETAL_EMPH + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = +#if !ETAL_EMPH + { " et~al." * } +#else ETAL_EMPH + { " {\em et~al.}" * } +#endif ETAL_EMPH +#if !CSC_NAMES + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } +#else CSC_NAMES + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ caps * } +#endif + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +#endif + +% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a +% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). +% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the +% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series +% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ +#if !NAMED_REFS + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +#else NAMED_REFS + "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * % this is for apalike +#endif +} + +% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the +% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. +% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct +% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else +% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). + +#if !NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +#else NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ "In" % this is for apalike + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear +% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These +% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for +% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the +% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. +% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, +% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. +% +% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may +% CROSSREF another article. +% Required fields: author, title, journal, year +% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note +% +% article == +% BEGIN +% output.bibitem +% output.check(format.authors,"author") +% new.block +% output.check(format.title,"title") +% new.block +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") +% output(format.vol.num.pages) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% else +% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) +% output(format.pages) +% fi +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. +% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year +% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, +% note +% +% book == +% BEGIN +% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") +% else output.check(format.authors,"author") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) +% fi +% fi +% new.block +% output.check(format.btitle,"title") +% if missing$(crossref) then +% output(format.bvolume) +% new.block +% output(format.number.series) +% new.sentence +% output.check(publisher,"publisher") +% output(address) +% else +% new.block +% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) +% fi +% output(format.edition) +% output.check(format.date,"year") +% new.block +% output(note) +% fin.entry +% END +% +% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" +% will be given for them. + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check +#if NAMED_REFS + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike +#endif NAMED_REFS +#if !ATIT_SUPPRESS + new.block + format.title "title" output.check +#endif + new.block + crossref missing$ +#if !VOLUME_SPACE +#if !JOUR_DEEMPH + { journal emphasize "journal" output.check +#else JOUR_DEEMPH + { journal "journal" output.check +#endif +#else VOLUME_SPACE +#if !JOUR_DEEMPH + { journal emphasize +#else JOUR_DEEMPH + { journal field.or.null +#endif +#endif +#if !NAMED_REFS +#if !DATE_FIRST +#if !PAREN_DATE + format.vol.num.pages output + format.date "year" output.check +#else PAREN_DATE + format.vol.num.pages + format.date empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.date paren } + { " " * format.date paren * } + if$ + } + if$ + output +#endif +#else DATE_FIRST + format.vol.num.pages output +#endif DATE_FIRST +#else NAMED_REFS + format.vol.num.pages output +#endif NAMED_REFS + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ +#if !NAMED_REFS + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } +#else NAMED_REFS + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } +#endif NAMED_REFS + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ +#if NAMED_REFS + output.year.check % special for apalike +#endif + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output +#if !NAMED_REFS + format.date "year" output.check +#endif + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output +#if !NAMED_REFS + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output +#else NAMED_REFS + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + howpublished output + address output +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. + +% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. +% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field +% will come before number and series. +% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year +% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ +#if !NAMED_REFS + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } +#else NAMED_REFS + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check + editor format.key output + } +#endif + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ +#if NAMED_REFS + output.year.check % special for apalike +#endif + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output +#if !NAMED_REFS + format.date "year" output.check +#endif + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title +% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). +% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, +% address, edition, month, note + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check +#if NAMED_REFS + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output +#if !NAMED_REFS + format.date "year" output.check +#endif !NAMED_REFS + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may +% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) +% will appear just before note. +% Required: author, title, booktitle, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check +#if NAMED_REFS + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output +#if !NAMED_REFS + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ +#else NAMED_REFS + address output % for apalike + new.sentence % there's no year + organization output % here so things + publisher output % are simpler +#endif NAMED_REFS + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +% A manual is technical documentation. +% Required: title +% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem +#if !NAMED_REFS + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output +#else NAMED_REFS + format.authors output + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + format.edition output +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check +#if NAMED_REFS + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output +#if !NAMED_REFS + format.date "year" output.check +#endif !NAMED_REFS + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. +% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields +% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output +#if !NAMED_REFS + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.title output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output +#else NAMED_REFS + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike + new.block + format.title output + new.block + howpublished output +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + note output + fin.entry +#if !NAMED_REFS + empty.misc.check +#endif +} + +% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. +% Required: author, title, school, year +% Optional: type, address, month, note + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check +#if NAMED_REFS + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output +#if !NAMED_REFS + format.date "year" output.check +#endif !NAMED_REFS + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. +% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will +% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); +% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. +% Required: title, year +% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, +% organization, publisher, note + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem +#if !NAMED_REFS + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ +#else NAMED_REFS + format.editors output + editor format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output +#if !NAMED_REFS + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ +#else NAMED_REFS + address output % for apalike + new.sentence % we always output + organization output % a nonempty organization + publisher output % here +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +% A techreport is a technical report. +% Required: author, title, institution, year +% Optional: type, number, address, month, note + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check +#if NAMED_REFS + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output +#if !NAMED_REFS + format.date "year" output.check +#endif !NAMED_REFS + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} + +% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. +% Required: author, title, note +% Optional: month, year + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check +#if NAMED_REFS + author format.key output % special for + output.year.check % apalike +#endif NAMED_REFS + new.block + format.title "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check +#if !NAMED_REFS + format.date output +#endif + fin.entry +} + +% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. +% Users are encouraged to use these macros. +% +% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated + +#if MONTH_FULL + +MACRO {jan} {"January"} + +MACRO {feb} {"February"} + +MACRO {mar} {"March"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"October"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"December"} + +#else !MONTH_FULL + +MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} + +MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} + +MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} + +MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} + +MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} + +MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} + +MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} + +MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} + +#endif MONTH_FULL + +% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; +% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. +% +% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make +% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then +% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command + +#if JOUR_FULL + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +#else !JOUR_FULL + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} + +MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} + +MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} + +#if PHYSICS_JOUR +#include "journal-abbrev.bst" +#endif PHYSICS_JOUR + +#endif JOUR_FULL + +% Now we read in the .BIB entries. + +READ + +% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's +% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting +% +% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len +% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the +% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. + +#if SORTED + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +#else !SORTED +#if LAB_ALPH + +% We need the chop.word stuff for the dubious unsorted-list-with-labels case. + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +#endif LAB_ALPH +#endif SORTED + +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels +% +% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of +% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, +% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; +% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). +% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just +% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), +% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean +% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we +% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. +% +% format.lab.names(s) == +% BEGIN +% numnames := num.names$(s) +% if numnames > 1 then +% if numnames > 4 then +% namesleft := 3 +% else +% namesleft := numnames +% nameptr := 1 +% nameresult := "" +% while namesleft > 0 +% do +% if (name_ptr = numnames) and +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" +% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else nameresult := nameresult * +% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% nameptr := nameptr + 1 +% namesleft := namesleft - 1 +% od +% if numnames > 4 then +% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" +% et.al.char.used := true +% else +% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") +% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token +% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) +% else +% nameresult := t +% fi +% fi +% return nameresult +% END +% +% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label +% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always +% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, +% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part +% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any +% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. +% +% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of +% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and +% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might +% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field +% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). +% +% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which +% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or +% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, +% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last +% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields +% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use +% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. +% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed +% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). +% +% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. +% +% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from +% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s +% until after sorting. +% +% calc.label == +% BEGIN +% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then +% author.editor.key.label +% else if type$ = "proceedings" then +% editor.key.organization.label +% else if type$ = "manual" then +% author.key.organization.label +% else +% author.key.label +% fi fi fi +% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) +% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label +% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits +% END + +#if LAB_ALPH + +#if !NAMED_REFS +INTEGERS { et.al.char.used } + +FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used} +{ #0 'et.al.char.used := +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used} +#endif !NAMED_REFS + +#if !NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +#if !RMP_LABELS +{ 's := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #1 > + { numnames #4 > + { #3 'namesleft := } + { numnames 'namesleft := } + if$ + #1 'nameptr := + "" + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr numnames = + { s nameptr "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { "{\etalchar{+}}" * + #1 'et.al.char.used := + } + { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ + numnames #4 > + { "{\etalchar{+}}" * + #1 'et.al.char.used := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ + duplicate$ text.length$ #2 < + { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ +} +#else RMP_LABELS +{ 's := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #1 > + { numnames #2 > +#if !CSC_NAMES +#if !ETAL_EMPH + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ " et~al." * } +#else ETAL_EMPH + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ " {\em et~al.}" * } +#endif ETAL_EMPH + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ +#else CSC_NAMES +#if !ETAL_EMPH + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ caps " et~al." * } +#else ETAL_EMPH + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ caps " {\em et~al.}" * } +#endif ETAL_EMPH + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ caps +#endif CSC_NAMES + s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = +#if !ETAL_EMPH + { " et~al." * } +#else ETAL_EMPH + { " {\em et~al.}" * } +#endif ETAL_EMPH +#if !CSC_NAMES + { " and " * s #2 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ * } +#else CSC_NAMES + { " and " * s #2 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ caps * } +#endif CSC_NAMES + if$ + } + if$ + } +#if !CSC_NAMES + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ } +#else CSC_NAMES + { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ caps } +#endif + if$ +} +#endif +#else NAMED_REFS +% There are three apalike cases: one person (Jones), +% two (Jones and de~Bruijn), and more (Jones et~al.). +% This function is much like format.crossref.editors. +% +FUNCTION {format.lab.names} +{ 's := +#if !CSC_NAMES + s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ +#else CSC_NAMES + s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ caps +#endif CSC_NAMES + s num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > +#if !ETAL_EMPH + { pop$ " et~al." * } +#else ETAL_EMPH + { pop$ " {\em et~al.}" * } +#endif ETAL_EMPH + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = +#if !ETAL_EMPH + { " et~al." * } +#else ETAL_EMPH + { " {\em et~al.}" * } +#endif ETAL_EMPH +#if !CSC_NAMES + { " and " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } +#else CSC_NAMES + { " and " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ caps * } +#endif + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +FUNCTION {author.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ +#if SORTED + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } +#else !SORTED % need warning here because we won't give it later + { "for label, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + cite$ #1 #3 substring$ + } +#endif SORTED +#if !NAMED_REFS + { key #3 text.prefix$ } +#else NAMED_REFS + 'key % apalike uses the whole key +#endif NAMED_REFS + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ +#if SORTED + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } +#else !SORTED % need warning here because we won't give it later + { "for label, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + cite$ #1 #3 substring$ + } +#endif SORTED +#if !NAMED_REFS + { key #3 text.prefix$ } +#else NAMED_REFS + 'key % apalike uses the whole key +#endif NAMED_REFS + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +#if !NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ +#if SORTED + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } +#else !SORTED % need warning here because we won't give it later + { "for label, need author, key, or organization in " cite$ * + warning$ + cite$ #1 #3 substring$ + } +#endif SORTED +#if !RMP_LABELS + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } +#else RMP_LABELS + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #9 text.prefix$ } +#endif + if$ + } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { author format.lab.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { organization empty$ +#if SORTED + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } +#else !SORTED % need warning here because we won't give it later + { "for label, need editor, key, or organization in " cite$ * + warning$ + cite$ #1 #3 substring$ + } +#endif SORTED +#if !RMP_LABELS + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } +#else RMP_LABELS + { "The " #4 organization chop.word #9 text.prefix$ } +#endif + if$ + } + { key #3 text.prefix$ } + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} +#else NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {editor.key.label} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } + 'key % apalike uses the whole key, no organization + if$ + } + { editor format.lab.names } + if$ +} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +FUNCTION {calc.label} +#if !KEY_CITE +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.key.label + { type$ "proceedings" = +#if !NAMED_REFS + 'editor.key.organization.label + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.key.organization.label + 'author.key.label + if$ + } +#else NAMED_REFS + 'editor.key.label % apalike ignores organization + 'author.key.label % for labeling and sorting +#endif NAMED_REFS + if$ + } + if$ +#if !NAMED_REFS + duplicate$ +#if !RMP_LABELS + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #2 substring$ +#else RMP_LABELS + " " * year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ +#endif + * + 'label := + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ + * + sortify 'sort.label := +#else NAMED_REFS + ", " % these three lines are + * % for apalike, which + year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ % uses all four digits + * + 'label := +#endif NAMED_REFS +} +#else KEY_CITE +{ cite$ 'label := +label sortify 'sort.label := +} +#endif + +% It doesn't seem like a particularly good idea to use an order-of-citation +% reference list when using alphabetic labels, but we need to have a +% special pass to calculate labels when this happens. + +#if !SORTED + +ITERATE {calc.label} + +#endif !SORTED + +#endif LAB_ALPH + +% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. +% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated +% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" +% come before "brinch hansen per". +% +% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by +% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization +% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on +% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title +% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). +% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. +% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank +% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves +% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, +% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), +% and four will separate year from title. +% +% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in +% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated +% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same +% as format.names. + +#if SORTED + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ +#if NAME_FULL + if$ + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := +#else + if$ % apalike uses initials + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := % <= here +#endif NAME_FULL + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { "et al" * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +% The sort.format.title function returns the argument, +% but first any leading "A "'s, "An "'s, or "The "'s are removed. +% The chop.word function uses s, so we need another string variable, t + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +% The auxiliary functions here, for the presort function, are analogous to +% the ones for calc.label; the same comments apply, except that the +% organization field takes precedence here over the key field. For sorting +% purposes, we still remove a leading "The " from the organization field. + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +#if !NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} +{ author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} +#else NAMED_REFS +FUNCTION {editor.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +#if !NAMED_REFS +% There is a limit, entry.max$, on the length of an entry string variable +% (which is what its sort.key$ is), so we take at most that many characters +% of the constructed key, and hope there aren't many references that match +% to that many characters! + +FUNCTION {presort} +#if LAB_ALPH +{ calc.label + sort.label + " " + * + type$ "book" = +#else !LAB_ALPH +{ type$ "book" = +#endif LAB_ALPH + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.organization.sort + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.organization.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +#if LAB_ALPH + * +#endif LAB_ALPH + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} +#else NAMED_REFS +% apalike uses two sorting passes; the first one sets the +% labels so that the `a's, `b's, etc. can be computed; +% the second pass puts the references in "correct" order. +% The presort function is for the first pass. It computes +% label, sort.label, and title, and then concatenates. +FUNCTION {presort} +{ calc.label + label sortify + " " + * + type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + #1 entry.max$ substring$ % for + 'sort.label := % apalike + sort.label % style + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +ITERATE {presort} + +% And now we can sort + +#if !NAMED_REFS +SORT +#else NAMED_REFS +SORT % by label, sort.label, title---for final label calculation +#endif + +#endif SORTED + +% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted +% +% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's +% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward +% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass +% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there +% are 'b's). +% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. +% +% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string +% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer +% +% initialize.longest.label == +% BEGIN +% longest.label := "" +% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) +% next.extra := "" +% longest.label.width := 0 +% last.extra.num := 0 +% END +% +% forward.pass == +% BEGIN +% if last.sort.label = sort.label then +% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 +% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) +% else +% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") +% extra.label := "" +% last.sort.label := sort.label +% fi +% END +% +% reverse.pass == +% BEGIN +% if next.extra = "b" then +% extra.label := "a" +% fi +% label := label * extra.label +% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then +% longest.label := label +% longest.label.width := width$(label) +% fi +% next.extra := extra.label +% END + +#if LAB_ALPH + +#if SORTED + +#if !NAMED_REFS +STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra } + +INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num } + +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'longest.label.width := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.sort.label sort.label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + sort.label 'last.sort.label := + } + if$ +} +#else NAMED_REFS +STRINGS { last.label next.extra } % apalike labels are only for the text; + +INTEGERS { last.extra.num } % there are none in the bibliography + +FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} % and hence there is no `longest.label' +{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := + "" 'next.extra := + #0 'last.extra.num := +} + +FUNCTION {forward.pass} +{ last.label label = + { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := + last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := + } + { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := + "" 'extra.label := + label 'last.label := + } + if$ +} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +FUNCTION {reverse.pass} +{ next.extra "b" = + { "a" 'extra.label := } + 'skip$ + if$ + label extra.label * 'label := +#if !NAMED_REFS + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +#endif !NAMED_REFS + extra.label 'next.extra := +} + +#if !NAMED_REFS +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} +#else NAMED_REFS +EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +ITERATE {forward.pass} + +REVERSE {reverse.pass} + +#if NAMED_REFS +% Now that the label is right we sort for real, +% on sort.label then year then title. This is +% for the second sorting pass. +FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} +{ sort.label + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {bib.sort.order} + +SORT % by sort.label, year, title---giving final bibliography order +#endif NAMED_REFS +#else !SORTED + +% It still doesn't seem like a good idea to use an order-of-citation +% reference list when using alphabetic labels, but when this happens we +% must compute the longest label + +STRINGS { longest.label } + +INTEGERS { longest.label.width } + +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} + +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} + +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} + +#endif SORTED + +#else !LAB_ALPH + +% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. +% We use either the sorted order or original order. +% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use +% by the "thebibliography" environment. + +STRINGS { longest.label } + +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } + +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} + +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} + +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} + +#endif LAB_ALPH + +% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. +% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic +% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. +% Then we give an incantation containing the command +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% where the `...' is the longest label. +% +% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +#if !NAMED_REFS +#if LAB_ALPH +{ et.al.char.used + { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + preamble$ empty$ +#else !LAB_ALPH +{ preamble$ empty$ +#endif LAB_ALPH + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} +#else NAMED_REFS +{ preamble$ empty$ % no \etalchar in apalike + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ % no labels in apalike +} +#endif NAMED_REFS + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +% Now we produce the output for all the entries + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/utils/misc/rfc2bib.awk b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/utils/misc/rfc2bib.awk new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6b5fa043ee --- /dev/null +++ b/obsolete/biblio/bibtex/utils/misc/rfc2bib.awk @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +###################################################################### +# +# $Id: rfc2bib.awk,v 1.19 2001/02/14 10:41:50 rmm1002 Exp $ +# + +# Translates rfc-index.txt to a BibTeX file; probably GNU gawk +# specific. + +# 20010214: fixed up handling of periods in titles (eg. HTTP1.1) by +# changing FS. Also dealt with altered date parsing for RFC768 (why +# the removal of hyphens? Wierd...) + +# (C) 2000 Richard Mortier, rmm1002@cl.cam.ac.uk + +# See http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~rmm1002/code.html for updates, etc. + +###################################################################### +# + +BEGIN { + + FS="[.] " ; RS="\n\n" ; + + # banner + printf ("%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%"); + printf ("%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\n"); + printf ("%%\n"); + printf ("%% Date: %s\n", strftime()); + printf ("%%\n"); + printf ("%% This file is auto-generated from rfc-index.txt by rfc2bib.awk\n") ; + printf ("%% by Richard Mortier (rmm1002 at cl.cam.ac.uk). Consequently it gets\n") ; + printf ("%% slightly confused by some entries, so as always\n") ; + printf ("%%\n"); + printf ("%% PROOF-READ YOUR DOCUMENT!\n") + printf ("%%\n"); + printf ("\n"); + printf ("@string{ietf=\"{IETF}\"}\n\n") ; + +} + +###################################################################### +# + +/^[0-9][0-9][0-9][0-9]/{ + + gsub(/[\n]/, "", $0) ; + gsub(/[ ]+/, " ", $0) ; + + # guard '$', '_', '#' from BibTeX/LaTeX in all fields + gsub(/\$/, "\\$", $0 ) ; # "); + gsub(/_/, "\\_", $0 ) ; # "); + gsub(/\#/, "\\" "\#", $0 ) ; # "); + + number = substr($1, 0, 4) ; + printf ("@TechReport{rfc:%s,\n", number ) ; + printf (" key = {{\\sc rfc%s}},\n", number ); + + # authors are all the fields "in the middle"; can be separated by + # commas or ampersands + authors = $2 ; + for (i=3 ; i < NF-1 ; i++) + { + if (length( $ (i) ) > 1) + { + authors = ( authors ".~" $ (i) ) ; + } + else + { + authors = ( authors "." $ (i) ) ; + } + } + gsub(/,| &/, " and", authors) ; + gsub(/^ /, "", authors) ; + if (length(authors) == 0) + { + authors = "author list not available" ; + } + printf (" author = {%s},\n", authors ) ; + + # guard capitals and '&' in the title + tmp = substr($1, 6) ; + title = gensub(/([A-Z])/, "{\\1}", "g", tmp) ; + gsub(/&/, "\\" "\\&", title ) ; # "); + printf (" title = {%s},\n", title) ; + + # just let the institution be the IETF for now + printf (" institution = ietf,\n") ; + + y_fld = $ (NF-1) ; + y_pos = length(y_fld) - 3 ; + year = substr(y_fld, y_pos, 4) ; + if (length(year) == 0) + { + year = "{year not available}" ; + } + printf (" year = %s,\n", year) ; + + printf (" type = {{\\sc rfc}},\n") ; + printf (" number = %s,\n", number) ; + + # early RFCs: mmm-dd-yyyy ; later RFCs: month yyyy + m_fld = $ (NF-1) ; + gsub(/-| |\n|[0-9]/, "", m_fld) ; + month = substr(tolower(m_fld), 0, 3) ; + if (length(month) == 0) + { + month = "{month not available}" ; + } + printf (" month = %s,\n", month) ; + + printf (" annote = {%s},\n", $NF) ; + printf ("}\n\n") ; + +} + +###################################################################### +###################################################################### |